Pontiac 1993 Bonneville Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-24

: Pontiac Pontiac-1993-Pontiac-Bonneville-Owners-Manual-818981 pontiac-1993-pontiac-bonneville-owners-manual-818981 pontiac pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 322 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1993
PONTIAC
Bonneville
(SE,
SSE,
SSEi)
OWNER'S
MANUAL
Pontiac
Bonneville
1993
Owner’s
Manual
Table
of
Contents
Introduction
How
to Use this Manual
...............
3
Part
1
Seats
&
Safety Belts
.................
s
Part
2
Features
&
Controls
...............
.45
Part
3
Comfort Controls
&
Audio Systems
....
119
Part
4
Your Driving and the Road
.........
.I45
I
Part
5
Problems on the Road
..............
191
Part
6
Service
&
Appearance Care
.........
221
I
Part
7
Maintenance Schedule.
...........
.275
Part
8
Customer Assistance Information
...
,297
Parts
Index
............................
311
Includes “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
302
Service Station Information.
...
Last
Page
Printed in
USA
10202135
B
Second Printing
. .
Important
Notes
About this Manual
Please keep this manual in your Pontiac,
so
it will be there if
you
ever need it when you’re
on
the road. If
you
sell
the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so
the new owner
can
use it.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right
to
make changes in the
product after that time without further notice.
Note
to
Canadian Owners
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of
Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual:
Aux
proprietaires canadiens:
Vous
pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en francais chez votre
concessionaire
ou
au DGN Marketing Services Ltd.,
1500
Bonhill Rd., Mississauga, Ontario
L5T
1C7.
Published
by
Pontiac Division
General Motors Corporation
The
word
Pontiac,
the
Pontiac emblem
and
the
name Bonneville
are
registered
trademarks
of
General
Motors
Corporation.
The word
Delco
is
a
registered trademark
of
General
Motors
Corporation.
0
Copyright
1992
General Motors Corporation, Pontiac Division.
All
rights
reserved.
...
2
+ow
to
Use
this
Manual
Using Your
1993
Pontiac
Owner’s Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual
from beginning to end when they first
receive their new vehicle. This will help
you learn about the features and controls
for your vehicle.
In
this manual, you’ll
find that pictures and words work
together
to
explain things quickly.
There are nine parts with color-tabbed
pages
in
this manual. Each part begins
with a brief list of contents,
so
you can
usually tell at a glance if that part
contains the information you want.
You can bend the manual slightly to
reveal the color tabs that help you find a
part.
c
Part
1:
Seats and Safety Belts
This part tells you how to use your seats
and safety belts properly.
Part
2:
Features
&
Controls
This part explains how
to
start and
operate your Pontiac.
Part
3:
Comfort Controls
&
Audio
Systems
This part tells you how to adjust the
ventilation and comfort controls and
how to operate your audio system.
3
How
to
Use
this
Manual
Using
bur
1993
Pontiac
Owner’s
Manual
(CONT.)
Part
4:
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and
tips about the road and how to drive
under different conditions.
Part
5:
Problems on the Road
This part tells you what to do if you
have a problem while driving, such as a
flat tire or engine overheating.
Part
6:
Service
&
Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep
your Pontiac running properly and
looking good.
Part
7:
Maintenance Schedule
This part tells you when to perform
vehicle maintenance and what fluids and
lubricants to use.
Part
8:
Customer Assistance
Information
This part tells you how to contact
Pontiac for assistance and how to get
service publications. It also gives you
information on
Reporting
Safety Defects.
Part
9:
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing
of
almost
every subject that’s
in
this manual. You
can use it to quickly find something you
want to read.
Service Station Information:
This is a quick reference of service
information. You can find it on the last
page of this manual.
.I.
4
c
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You
will find a number of safety
cautions in this book. We use yellow
and the word CAUTION to tell you
I
bAU
I
IUIV
Vehicle Damage Warnings
You will also find a red circle with a Also,
in
this book you will find these
slash through it in this book. This safety blue notices:
symbol means:
about things that could hurt you-if you
were to ignore the warning.
Don’t
Don’t
do
this
Don’t let this happen
These mean there
is
something
L
that could hurt
you
or
other
people.
I
In the yellow caution area, we tell you
what the hazard is. Then we tell you
what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If
you don’t, you or others could be hurt.
These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
In the blue notice area, we tell you
about something that can damage your
vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and
it
could be costly. But the notice will tell
you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you
might see CAUTION and NOTICE
warnings in different colors or
in
different words. In this manual, we’ve
used the familiar words and colors that
Pontiac has used for years.
You’ll also see warning labels on your
vehicle. They
use
the same colors, and
the words CAUTION or NOTICE.
5
...
How
to
Use
this
Manual
Vehicle
Symbols
These are some
of
the symbols
you
will
find on your vehicle. For example, these
symbols are used on an original battery:
Caution Possible injury
A
Protect Eyes by Shielding
@
Caustic Battery Acid
Could Cause Burns
Avoid Spark or Flames
Sparks or Flame Could
Explode Battery
m..
6
These symbols are important
for
you
and your passengers whenever your
vehicle is driven:
Fasten Safety Belts
Door LocWUnlock
These symbols have
to
do with your
lights:
Master Lighting Switch
Turn Signal Direction
Hazard Warning Flashers
Headlight High Beam
Parking Lights
Fog Lights
pf
$0
r
These symbols are
on
some
of
your
controls:
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Headlight Washers
Windshield Defroster
Rear Window Defogger
Q@
Ventilating Fan
Power Window
These
symbols
are
used
on
warning and
indicator lights:
L
I
a
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Battery Charging
System
Fuel
Engine
Oil
Pressure
Brake
Anti-Lock Brakes
How
to
Use
this
Manual
Here are
some
other
symbols
you
may
see:
Fuse
Trunk Release
Lighter
Horn
Speaker
Hood Release
mm.
8
t
r
Y
.
Here youW find information about
the seats in your Pontiac. your
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(“air bag”) system and how
to
use
your safety belts properly
.
You can
also learn about some things you
should
not
do with safety belts
.
Part
1
Seats
&
Safety
Belts
Seats and Seat Controls
...........................................
10
SafetyBelts
......................................................
13
How
to
Wear Safety Belts Properly
....................................
18
Driver Position
.......................................
......
18
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System (Air Bag)
.....................
22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
....................................
29
Right Front Passenger Position
.......................................
29
Center Passenger Position
...........................................
30
Children
.........................................................
33
Smaller Children and Babies
.........................................
33
Child Restraints
...................................................
34
LargerChildren
...................................................
42
Safety Belt Extender
...............................................
43
Replacing Safety Belts After a Crash
...............................
44
Rear Seat Passengers
.....................
......................
31
9
...
Seats
&
Safety
Eelts
rn
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells
you
about the seats-
how
to adjust them-and
also
about
reclining seatbacks and head restraints.
10
Manual Front Seat
A
You
can lose control of the
1
vehicle if
you
try
to adjust a
manual driver's seat while the
vehicle
is
moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make
you
push a
pedal when
you
don't want to.
Adjust the driver's seat
only
when
the vehicle is not moving.
.
.
Move the control lever under the front
of
the seat to unlock
it.
Slide the seat to
where you want it. Then release the
lever and
try
to move the seat
with
your
body, to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
Y
Power Seat
(OPTION)
To adjust the power seat on some
models:
Front Control
(A):
Raise the front of
the seat by holding the switch up. Lower
the front
of
the seat by holding the
switch down.
Center Control
(B):
Move the seat
forward or back by holding the control
to the right or left.
Move the seat higher by holding the
control up. Lower the seat by holding
the control down.
Rear Control
(C):
Raise the rear
of
the
seat by holding the switch
up.
Lower the
rear
of
the seat by holding the switch
down.
Adjustable
Suppot
Seat
(omoN)
On some models, you'll find the
controls on the center console. Slide the
selector switch
to
L
or
R
to choose the
front seat
you
want to adjust.
JbAdjusts the seat forward
or
back.
AJ
Adjusts the seat up or down.
I
4
Adjusts the seatback to an upright
*or reclined position. Don't have a
seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Adjusts the position of the
seatback side bolsters.
'9
Tilts the rear
of
the seat up or
Ad
Tilts the front of the seat
up
or
down.
down.
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
Adjustable
Support
Seat
(CONTJ
Lumbar
Controls
I
Reshapes the lower back area of
the
seat.
d.
Reshapes
the
middle back area of
the seat.
n
&
Reshapes the upper back area of
the seat.
Manual Reclining Seatback
(OPTION)
Lift
the
lever to release the seatback,
then tilt the seatback forward or
backward, as desired. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in place.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if
your vehicle is moving.
L
Sitting
in
a
reclined
position
motion
can
be
dangerous.
Even
if
you
buckle up, your
safety
belts
can’t
do
their
job when
you’re
reclined like
this.
The
shoulder belt
can’t
do
its
job
because
it won’t
be
against
your
body.
Instead,
it
will
be
in
front
of
you.
In
a
crash
you
could
go
into
;+
receiving neck
or
other injuries.
I
Len your vehicle
is
in
I
ne
lap
belt
can’t
do
its
job
either.
In
a
crash
the
belt
could
go
up
over
your abdomen.
The
belt forces
would
be
there,
not
at
your
pelvic
(Cantinued)
I..
12
1
(Continued)
-
)ones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is
in
motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back
in
the seat and wear your
safety belt properly.
I
I
Head
Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down
so
that the top
of
the restraint is closest to
the top
of
your ears.
This position reduces the chance
of
a
neck injury in a crash.
On some models, you can also adjust
the head restraint by tilting the pad
forward
or
rearward.
1
Safety
Belts:
They’re
For
Everyone
This part
of
the manual tells you how to
use safety belts properly. It also tells you
some things you should not do
with
safety belts. And it explains the
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint,
or
“air bag” system.
I3
Seats
&
Safety
Eelts
Safety
Belts:
Zley
’re For
Everyone
(Cont.)
A
L
Don’t let anyone ride where
they can’t wear a safety belt
properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be
much
worse.
You
can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it.
You
can
be seriously injured or killed.
In
the
same crash, you might not
be
if
you are buckled up. Always
%ten your safety belt, and check
at
your passengers’ belts are
-_stened properly too.
This figure lights up when you turn the
key to
Run
or
Start
when your safety
belt isn’t buckled, and you’ll hear a
chime, too. It’s the reminder to buckle
up. In many states and Canadian
provinces, the law says to wear safety
belts. Here’s why:
They
work.
P
You
never
know
if you’ll be in a crash.
If you do have a crash,
you
don’t know
if it will be a bad one.
A
few crashes are very mild. In them,
you won’t get
hurt
even if you’re not
buckled up. And some crashes can be
so
serious, like being hit by a train, that
even buckled
up
a person wouldn’t
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many
of
them, people who
buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could be
badly hurt or killed.
After
25
years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter.
.
.
a lot!
14
Why Safety Belfs Work
When you ride in or on anything, you
go
as
fast
as
it goes.
1.
For
example,
if
the bike
is
going
10
mph
(16
kmlh),
so
is
the child.
2.
When the bike hits the block,
it
3.
Take the simplest ‘‘car.’
’
Suppose
stops. But the child keeps going! it’s just a seat on wheels.
15
...
Seats
&
Safety
Belts
Why
Safety
Belts
Work
(CONI)
4.
Put someone on it.
7.
or
the instrument panel..
.
16
5.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
“car.”
The rider doesn’t stop.
8.
or the safety belts!
6.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In
a
real
vehicle,
it
could be the
windshield..
.
With safety belts,
you
slow down
as
the
vehicle
does.
You
get
more
time
to
stop.
You
stop
over
more distance, and
your
strongest
bones take the forces.
That’s
why
safety belts make such
good
sense.
Here Are Questions Many People
Ask
About Safety Belts-
and the Answers
Q:
Won’t
1
be trapped in the vehicle
after an accident if I’m wearing a
safety belt?
wearing a safety belt or not. But you
can easily unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident,
so
you
can
unbuckle and get out,
is
much
greater
if
you are belted.
A:
You
could
be-whether you’re
Q:
Why don’t they just put in air
bags
so
people won’t have to wear
safety belts?
Inflatable Restraint systems, are in
some vehicles today and will be in
more of them in the future. But they
are supplemental systems
only-so
they work
with
safety belts, not
instead of them. Every “air bag’’
system ever offered for sale has
required the use
of
safety belts. Even
if you’re
in
a vehicle that has “air
bags,”
you
still have to buckle up to
get the most protection. That’s true
not
only
in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
A:
“Air bags,” or Supplemental
Q:
If I’m a good driver,
and
I never
drive far from home, why should I
wear safety belts?
if you’re in an accident-even one
that isn’t your fault-you and your
passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from
things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
25
miles
(440
h)
of
home. And the greatest
number of serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
40
mph
(65
km/h).
Safety belts are
for
everyone.
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but
17
Seats
&
Safety
Eelts
Satiety
Belt Reminder
Light
When the key is turned to
Run
or
Start,
a light will come on for about eight
seconds to remind people to fasten their
safety belts. Unless the driver’s safety
belt is buckled, a chime will also sound.
w
How
to Wear Safety Belts
Properly-Adults
This section is only for people of adult
size.
First, you’ll want to know which
restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll
start
with the driver position.
Driver Position
This section describes the driver’s
restraint system.
LapShoulder
Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt.
Here’s how to wear
it
properly.
1.
Close and lock the door.
2.
Adjust the seat (to see how,
see
the
Index
under
Seat Controls)
so
you
can sit up straight.
3.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the
belt across you. Don’t let it get
twisted.
4.
Push
the latch plate into the buckle
until
it
clicks.
If
the belt isn’t long enough, see the
Index
under
Safety Belt Extender.
Make sure the release button on the
buckle faces upward or outward
so
you
would be able
to
unbuckle it quickly
if
you ever had
to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug
on
the hips, just touching
the thighs.
In
a crash, this applies force
to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If
you slid under it, the belt would apply
force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious
or
even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These
parts of the body are best able to
take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden
stop or crash.
IS
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
Lap-Shoulder
Belt
(CONTI
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
You
can move the shoulder belt adjuster
to
the
height that is right for
you.
To move
it
up or down, squeeze the
release handle. When
you
release the
handle,
try
to move
it
down a little to
make sure
it
has locked into position.
You can move the adjuster
up
from a
lower position by pushing the bottom of
the release handle.
Adjust
the
height
so
that
the
shoulder
portion of the belt is properly positioned
on your shoulder, away from your face
and neck.
To
help
you
find a height that is right for
you,
follow these guidelines:
For a Tall Person:
Use
the
upper or upper-middle position.
For
a Person
of
Average Height:
Use a position somewhere in the
middle.
For
a
Short Person:
Use the lower or lower-middle position.
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong
won’t give nearly as much protection place.
1
this way.
You
can be serio
your belt is buck
your shoulder belt is too wrong place like this.
loose.
In
a
crash, you would move
the
belt would
go
up
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt
is
worn under the
arm. It should be
worn
over the
shoulder at all times.
musly injured
if
;led
in
the
T
You
can
be seriously
injured
if
.
-
you
wear
the
shoulder
belt
In
a
crasn,
forward too much; which could
’
abdomen. The belt forces would
increase injury. The shoulder belt be there, not at the pelvic bones.
should
fit
against your body. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
under
your
arm.
In
a
crash,
your
body would
move
too
far
forward,
which would
increase
the chance
of
head
and
neck injury.
Also,
the
belt
would
apply
too
much
force
to
the ribs, which aren’t
as
strong
as
shoulder bones.
You
could
also
severely
injure
internal
organs
like
your liver
or
spleen.
3veryour
3
I
I
21
...
Seats
&
Safety
Belts
!ap-Shoulder
Belt
(CONI)
2:
What’s
wrong with this?
4:
The belt is twisted across the body.
You
MLI~
be
seriously
injured
ky
a
twisted belt.
In
a
crash,
you
wouldn’t
have
the
full
width
of
the
belt to
spread
impact
forces.
If
a
belt
is
twisted,
make
it
straight
so
it
can
work
properly,
or
ask
your
dealer
to
fix
it.
x1102
I
To unlatch the belt. just push the button
on the buckle. The belt should go back
out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the
belt
is
out of
the
way. If you slam the
door
on
it,
you can damage both the belt
and your vehicle.
H1132
Supplemental Znjlatable
Restraint System (Air
Bag)
This section explains the driver’s
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR)
or “air bag” system. Your Pontiac may
have an air bag for the driver and for the
right-front passenger.
...
22
Your Pontiac may have the right-front
passenger’s
SIR
option.
If
your vehicle
has an air bag for the right-front
passenger,
it
will
say
SIR
on the
instrument panel above the glove box.
Here are the Most
Important Things
to
Know:
Even with an air bag, if you’re
not wearing a safety belt and
Y
you.re
in
a crash, your injuries
may be much worse. Air bags are
Air bags inflate with great
force, faster than
the
blink
of
an eye.
If
you’re
too
close
to an
inflating air bag, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts
help
keep
you in position for
an
air bag
inflation
in
a crash.
Always
wear
your safety belt, even with an air
bag, and sit as far back
as
you
can
while still maintaining control
of
your vehicle.
“not
designed
to
inflate
in
rollovers
or in rear, side or low-speed
frontal crashes. You need to wear
your safety belt
to
reduce the
chance
of
hitting things inside the
vehicle
or
being ejected from
it.
Always wear your safety belt, even
with an air bag.
A
An
inflating air
bag
can
children. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle.
To
read
how, see the
Children
and
Safe9
Belts
section
of
this
manual,
and
read the caution label
on
the
front
passenger’s safety belt.
-
seriously injure small
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
Air
Bag
System Light
There
is
an air bag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows
INFLATABLE
RESTRAINT.
The
system checks itself and the light tells
you if there is a problem.
You
will see this light flash for a
few
seconds when you turn your ignition to
Run
or
Start.
Then the light should go
out,
which means the system is ready.
If
the air bag readiness light
L
b
doesn’t come
on
when
you
s
t
your vehicle, or stays on, or
comes on when you are driving,
your air bag system may
not
work
properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
4
3
How
the Air Bag System Works
Q:
Where
is
the air
bag?
A:
The driver’s air bag is in the middle
of
the steering wheel.
..
A
d
Q:
When is an air bag expected to
inflate?
A:
The air bag is designed to inflate in
x1210
I
If
your vehicle has a right-front
passenger air bag, it is located in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s
side.
moderate to severe frontal or near-
frontal crashes. The air bag will only
inflate if the velocity
of
the impact is
above the designed threshold level.
When impacting straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the
threshold level for most
GM
vehicles
is between
9
and
14
mph
(14
and
23
km/h). However, this velocity
threshold depends on the vehicle
design and may be several miles-per-
hour faster or slower. In addition,
this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher
if
the vehicle
strikes an object such as a parked car
which will move and deform on
impact. The air bag is also not
designed to inflate
in
rollovers, side
impacts, or rear impacts where the
inflation would provide no occupant
protection benefit.
In
any
particular crash, the
determination of whether the air bag
should have inflated cannot be based
solely
on
the level of damage on the
vehicle(s). Inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and the
vehicle’s deceleration, of which
vehicle damage is
only
one
indication. Repair cost is not a good
indicator of whether an air bag
should have deployed.
Q:
What makes an air bag inflate?
A:
In a frontal impact of sufficient
severity, sensors strategically located
on the vehicle detect that the vehicle
is suddenly stopping as
a
result of a
crash. These sensors complete an
electrical circuit, triggering a
chemical reaction of the sodium
azide sealed in the inflator. The
reaction produces nitrogen gas,
which inflates the cloth bag. The
inflator, cloth bag, and related
hardware are all part of the air bag
inflator module packed inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the passenger if
there is a passenger air bag.
26
DDD
Seats
&
Safety Belts
How
the
Air
Bag
System
Works
(CON
X)
Q:
How
does an air bag restrain?
A:
In
moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions, even belted
occilpants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. The
air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags
distribute the force
of
the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant
more gradually. But air bags would
not provide protection
in
many types
of collisions, including rollovers and
rear and side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not
toward the air bag. Air bags should
never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement
to
safety belt
protection in moderate to severe
frontal and near-frontal collisions.
Q:
What
will
you
see after an air bag
inflation?
A:
After the air bag has inflated, it will
then quickly deflate. This occurs
so
quickly that some people may not
even realize that the air bag inflated.
The air bag will
not
impede the
driver’s vision or ability to steer the
vehicle, nor will it hinder the
occupants from exiting the vehicle.
There will be small amounts of smoke
coming from vents in the deflated air
bag. Some components of the air bag
module in the steering wheel hub for
the driver’s air bag or the instrument
panel for the passenger’s bag may be
hot for a short time, but the portion
of the bag that comes into contact
with
you
will not be hot to the touch.
The nitrogen gas used to inflate the
air bag will have vented into the
passenger compartment, and
the
bag
will be deflated within seconds after
the collision. Nitrogen makes
up
about
80%
of the air we breathe and
is not hazardous.
As
the nitrogen
vents from the bag, small particles
are also vented into
the
passenger
compartment.
In
many crashes severe enough to
inflate an air bag, windshields may
be broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may
occur in vehicles with passenger air
bags because the windshield acts as a
reaction surface for the inflating air
bag.
mm.
26
L
Don’t attach anything to
the
steering wheel pad. It might injure the
If
your vehicle has the right-front passenger’s air bag, don’t set anything
on
or
attach anything to the instrument panel.
It
might injure the passenger if
the air bag inflates.
The air bags
are
designed to inflate
only
once. After they inflate, you’ll need
some new parts for your air bag system.
If
you
don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there
to
help protect you in another crash.
A
new system
will include the air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual has information about the need to replace other parts.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper
service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly.
See
your
dealer
for
service.
b
driver if the air bag inflates.
If
you
damage the cover
for
the
right-front passenger’s air bag, it
may not work properly.
You
may
have to replace both the air bag
and the instrument panel. Don’t
open or break the air bag cover.
7
27
Servicing
Bur
Pontiac with
the
Air Bag System
Please tell
or
remind anyone who works
on your Pontiac that it has the air bag
system. There are parts of the air bag
system in several places around your
vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on
your vehicle. The air bag system does
not need regular maintenance. Your
Pontiac dealer and the
1993
Bonneville
Service Manual have information about
the air bag system, including repair or
disposal.
For
up to two minutes after
L
b
the ignition key is
turned
off
and the battery disconnected,
an
air bag can still inflate during
improper service. You can be
injured if you are close to
an
air
bag when it inflates. Be sure to
follow the proper service
procedures.
When electrical work is done under
the
hood
or
inside your vehicle, the ignition
should be in
LOCK,
if possible.
Avoid wires wrapped with yellow
tape,
or
yellow connectors. They are probably
part of the air bag system.
If
your vehicle has a driver’s air bag and
a right-front passenger’s air bag, both
bags must be disconnected
if
the
ignition has to be on for electrical work
Dr if the steering column is to be
disassembled.
First, disconnect
the
driver’s air bag like
this:
.
Turn
off the ignition.
Remove the
SIR
(air bag) fuse (see the
Index
under
Fuses
&
Circuit
Breakers).
Disconnect the yellow connector at
the base of the steering column.
After you follow this procedure for the
driver’s air bag, then disconnect the
right-front passenger’s air bag like this:
Lower the passenger side hush panel
under the glove box.
Disconnect the yellow connector at
the base of
the
instrument panel.
When the work is complete, if the air
bag system was disconnected, be sure
to
reattach everything and replace the fuse
before turning the ignition on. When
you turn
the
ignition key on, be sure you
see the inflatable restraint light on
the
instrument panel. If you don’t see this
light flash and then go out as usual, have
your air bag system repaired.
..
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they-are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear
safety belts.
A
pregnant woman should
wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be
worn
as low as
possible throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to
protect the mother. When a safety belt is
worn properly, it’s more likely that
the
fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key
to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right-front passenger’s safety belt
works the same way as the driver’s
safety belt. See the
Index
under
Driver
Position.
When the lap portion of the belt is
pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it
does, let it go back all the way and start
again.
If your vehicle has a center passenger
position, be sure to use the correct
buckle when buckling your lap-shoulder
belt. If you find that the latch plate will
not go fully into the buckle, see if you
are using the buckle for the center
passenger position.
29
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
Center Passenger Position
If
your vehicle has rear and/or front
bench seats, someone can sit in the
center positions.
When you sit
in
a center seating
position, you have a lap safety belt,
which has
no
retractor.
To
make the belt longer, tilt the latch
plate and pull it along the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same
way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder
belt.
If the belt isn't long enough, see the
Index
under
Safety Belt Extender.
Make sure the release button
on
the
buckle faces upward or outward
so
you
would be able to unbuckle
it
quickly
if
you ever had to.
am.
30
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat
passengers to buckle up! Accident
statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing
safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And
they
can strike others
in
the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger
Positions
The positions next to the windows have
lap-shoulder belts.
I
Here’s
How
to
Wear
One
Properly:
1
.
Pick up the latch plate and pull it
across
you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2.
Push the latch plate into the buckle
until it clicks.
When the lap belt
is
pulled out
all
the
way, it will lock.
If
it does, let it go back
all the way and
start
again.
If the belt is not long enough, see the
Index
under
Safety
Belt
Extender.
Make sure
the
release button on the
buckle faces upward
or
outward
so
you
would be able to unbuckle it quickly if
you ever had to.
31
Ifety
6elts
Rear
Seat Outside Passenger
Positions
(CONT:)
The lap part of the belt should be
worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
In
a crash, this applies force
to
the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If
you slid under it, the belt would apply
force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should
go
over the
shoulder and across the chest. These
parts
of
the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
32
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden
stop or a crash.
a,
You
can
be
seriously
hurt
if
your
shoulder
belt
is
too
loose,
€n
a
crash,
you
would
mm
forwand
too
much, which
could
increase
injury.
The shoulder
belt
should
fit
against
your
body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button
on the buckle.
I
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection!
That includes infants and all children
smaller than adult size. In fact, the law
in
every state and Canadian province
says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
S
rmaller Children and Babies
Smaller
children
and babies
should always
be
restrained in
a
child
or
infant
restraint.
The
instructions
for
the
restraint
will
say
whether it
is
the
right
type
and
size
for
your
child.
A
very
young
child’s
hip
bones
are
so
small
that
a
regular belt might
not
stay
low
on
the
hips,
as
itshould. Instead,
the
belt
will
likely
be
over
the
child’s abdomen.
In
a
crash
the
belt
would
apply
force
right
on
the
child’s abdomen, which could
cause
serious
or
fatal
injuries.
So,
be
sure
that any child
small
enough
for
one
is
always properly
restrained
in
a
child
or
infimt
restraint
*
,
Never hold
a
baby
in
your
-
L
arms
while riding
in
a
vehicle.
A
baby
doesn’t
weigh
much-until
a crash.
During
a
crash
a
baby
will
become
so
heavy
you
can’t
hold
it.
For
example,
in
a
crash
at
only
25
mph
(40
km/h),
a
E-pound
(5.5
kg)
baby
will
suddedy
become
a
240-pound
(110
kg)
force
on
your
arms.
The baby would
be
.almost
impossible to
hold.
(Coratinud]
33
...
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
I
xi11
Smaller Children and Babies
(CONT)
Child Restraints
Be sure to follow the instructions for the
restraint. You may find these
instructions
on
the restraint itself or
in
a
booklet, or both. These restraints use
the belt system in your vehicle, but the
child also has to be secured within the
restraint to help reduce the chance of
personal injury. The instructions that
come with the infant or child restraint
will show you how to do that.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are
safer
if
they are restrained in the
rear
rather than the front seat. We at General
Motors therefore recommend that you
put your child restraint in the rear seat.
If your vehicle has an air bag for the
front passenger,
never
put a rear-facing
child restraint
in
the front passenger
seat. Here’s
why
:
...
34
A
child in a rear-facing child
L
restraint can be seriously
1nJured if the right-front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is
because the back of a rear-facing
child restraint would,be very close
to the inflating air bag.
If
your
vehicle has a right-front
passenger’s air bag, always secure
a rear-facing child restraint
in
the
rear seat.
You
may secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right-front
seat. However, before securing a
forward-facing child restraint,
ALWAYS
move the front passenger
seat as far back as
it
will
go.
Or,
secure the child restraint in the
rear seat.
I
I
A
A
child in
a
child restraint in
L
the front-center seat can
be
badly injured by the passenger air
bag if it inflates.
NEVER
use a
child restraint in the front-center
seat. It’s always better
to
secure a
child restraint
in
the rear seat.
You
may, however, secure a forward-
facing child restraint
in
the right-
front passenger seat
only
with the
seat moved all the way back.
:cure the child restraint properly.
A
An
unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision
or sudden stop and injure people
in
the vehicle. Be sure
to
properly
secure
any child restraint in your
vehicle-even when no child is in it.
35
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
A
I
TOP
strap
If
your child restraint has a top strap,
it
should be anchored. If you need to have
an anchor installed, you can ask your
Pontiac dealer to
put
it in for
you.
If you
want to install an anchor yourself, your
dealer can tell you how to do it.
Vehicles first sold
in
Canada have child
restraint anchor bracket hardware
in
the
glove box, along with instructions for
installing it. This should be used only
with a child restraint, and only to secure
a child restraint at the center rear seating
position. Additional anchor brackets for
child restraints at one or both of the rear
outside seating positions are available at
Pontiac dealerships
in
Canada.
Securing a Child Restraint in
a
Rear Outside Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.
See the earlier section about the top
strap
if
the child restraint has one.
1.
Put the restraint on the seat. Follow
the
instructions for the child
restraint.
2.
Secure the child
in
the child restraint
as the instructions say.
3.
Pull out the vehicle’s safety belt and
run the lap part through or around
the restraint. The child restraint
instructions
will
show
you
how.
See
if
the shoulder belt would go
in
front of the child’s face or neck. If
so,
put
it
behind
the
child restraint.
4.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the
release button faces upward or
outward,
so
you’ll be able to un-
buckle it quickly
if
you
ever need to.
5.
Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way
out of
the
retractor to set the lock.
6.
To tighten the belt, feed it into the
retractor while you push down on the
child restraint.
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in
different directions
to
be sure it is
secure.
To
remove the child restraint, just
unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let
it
go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
37
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position
When
you
secure a child restraint in a
center seating position, you'll be using
the lap belt. See the earlier section
about the top strap
if
the child restraint
has one.
1
X1117
1
1.
Make the belt
as
long as possible by
tilting the latch plate and pulling it
along the belt.
the instructions for the child
restraint.
as the instructions say.
2.
Put the restraint on the seat. Follow
3.
Secure the child in the child restraint
4.
Run
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you
how.
release button faces upward or out-
ward,
so
you'll be able to unbuckle
it
quickly
if
you ever need to.
6.
To
tighten the belt, pull its free end
while
you
push down
on
the child
restraint.
5.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the
7.
Push and pull the child restraint in
different directions to
be
sure it is
secure.
If
the child restraint isn’t
secure, turn the latch plate over and
buckle it again. Then see if it
is
secure. If it
isn’t,
secure the restraint
in a different place in the vehicle and
contact the child restraint maker
for
their advice.
To
remove the child restraint, just
unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will
be
ready
to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
A
rear-fixing child restraint
in
the front seat could be pushed
into
the
seatback
by
the
right-front
passenger’s air bag if it inflates.
A
child in a rear-facing child restraint
can
be
seriously injured if
this
happens. Always secure a
rear-
facing
child restraint in the rear
seat.
Seats
&
Safety
ms
Securing
a
Child Restraint in the
Right Font Seat
(CONTJ
1
.
If you have
the
right-front passenger’s
SIR, move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing a front-facing
child restraint.
the instructions for the child
restraint.
3.
Secure the child in the child restraint
as the instructions say.
4.
Pull out the vehicle’s safety belt and
run the lap part through
or
around
the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
See if the shoulder belt would go in
front of the child’s face or neck. If
so,
put it behind the child restraint.
2.
Put the restraint on the seat. Follow
5.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the
release button faces upward or
outward,
so
you’ll be able to un-
buckle it quickly if
you
ever need to.
6.
Pull the rest
of
the lap belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
...
40
L
L
7.
To
tighten the belt, feed the lap belt
back into the retractor while you
push down on the child restraint.
8.
Push and pull the child restraint in
different directions to be sure it is
secure.
To
remove the child restraint, just
unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let
it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
41
I
Seats
&
Safety
6elts
Larger
Children
Children who have outgrown child
restraints should wear the vehicle's
safety belts.
If
you have the choice, a
child should sit next to a window
so
the
child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are
safer
if
they are restrained in the rear
seat. But they need to use the safety
belts properly.
Children who aren't buckled up can be
thrown out
in
a crash.
Children who aren't buckled up can
strike other people who are.
...
42
t
c
CAUTION
I
'Here
two
children
are
wearing
the
same
belt.
The
belt
can't
properly
spread
the
impact
forces.
In
a
csash,
the
two
children
can
be
crushed
together
and
seriously
injured.
A
belt
must
k
used
by
only
one
person
at
a
time.
...
..
Q:
What if a child
is
wearing
a
lap-
shoulder belt, but the child is
so
small that the shoulder belt
is
very
close to the child’s face
or
neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of
the vehicle, but be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder,
so
that
in
a crash the
child’s upper body would have the
restraint that belts provide.
If the child is
so
small that the
shoulder belt
is
still very close to the
child’s face or neck, you might want
to place
the
child
in
the center seat
position, the one that has only a lap
belt.
CAUTION
I
A
Never
do
this.
Here
a
child is sitting in a
seat
that
has
a
lap-shoulder belt,
but
the
shoulder
part
is
behind the child.
If the child
wean
the
belt in this
way, in a.crash the
child
might
slide under the belt. The
belt’s
force would
then
be applied
right
on
the
child’s abdomen. That could
cause
serious
or
fatal injuries,
Jherever the child sits, the lap portion
f
the belt should be
worn
low and snug
n
the hips, just touching the child’s
lighs. This applies belt force to the
nild’s pelvic bones in a crash.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it. But if a
safety belt isn’t long enough
to
fasten,
your dealer will order you an extender.
It’s free. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so
the
extender will be long enough for
you. The extender will be just for you,
and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use
it,
and use it only for the seat it is made
to fit.
To
wear it, just attach it to the
regular safety belt.
43
m..
Seats
&
Safety 6elts
Checking
Your
Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure all your belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors,
anchorages and reminder systems are
working properly. Look for any loose
parts or damage. If you see anything that
might keep a restraint system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Safety Belts After
a
Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new
belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing
may be necessary. But if the belts were
stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you
need new belts.
If
belts are cut or damaged, replace
them. Collision damage also may mean
you will have to have safety belt parts,
like the retractor, replaced or anchorage
locations repaired-even if the belt
wasn’t being used at the time of the
collision.
If
your seat adjuster won’t work after
a
crash, the special part of the safety belt
that goes through the seat
to
the adjuster
may need
to
be replaced,
II
Q:
What’s
wrong
with this?
A:
The belt is
torn.
...
Part
2
Features
&
Controls
Here you can learn about the
many standard and optional features
on your Pontiac. and information on
starting. shifting and braking
.
Also
explained are the instrument panel
and the warning systems that tell
you
if
everything
is
working
properly-and what to do
if
you have
a problem
.
Keys
............................................................
46
Locks
...........................................................
47
Remote Keyless Entry
..............................................
48
GloveBox
.......................................................
56
Ignitionswitch
...................................................
57
StartingYourEngine
...............................................
58
Shifting the Transaxle
.............................................
-61
ParkingBrake
....................................................
67
Shifting into Park
........
......................................
68
Windows
........................................................
73
Turn SignaUHeadlight Beam Lever
....................................
73
Windshield Wipers
.................................................
75
Windshield Washer
................................................
76
CruiseControl
....................................................
77
Lightcontrols
....................................................
81
Interior Lights
....................................................
84
Mirrors
.........................................................
86
Sunroof
.........................................................
89
Ashtrays and Lighter
..............................................
-91
Instrument Panel
...................................................
94
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
..................................
99
Gages
..........................................................
108
Driver Information Center
..........................................
111
Electronic Compass
...............................................
113
Head-Up Display
...............................................
116
Features
&
Controls
Keys
\
,
Leaving young children in a
vehicle with the ignition key
1s
dangerous for many reasons. A
child or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
lerate power windows or other
ntrols or even make the vehicle
I
move. Don’t leave the keys in a
vehicle with young children.
The ignition keys are for the ignition
only.
The door keys are for the doors and all
other locks.
When a new Pontiac is delivered, the
dealer removes the plugs from the keys
and gives them to the first owner.
However, the ignition key may not have
a plug.
Each plug has a code on
it
that tells your
dealer or a qualified locksmith how to
make extra keys. Keep the plugs in a
safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll
be able to have new ones made easily
using these plugs. If your ignition keys
don’t have plugs, go to your Pontiac
dealer for the correct key code if you
need a
new
ignition key.
There are
15
alternative PASS-Key@
blanks, to help discourage
theft.
Your
dealer can help determine which blank
you need.
Your Pontiac
has
a
number of
new
features that can help prevent theft.
But
you
can have
a
lot
of
trouble
getting into your vehicle
if
you
ever
lock your keys, inside. You may even
have to darnage
your
vehicle
to
get in.
So
be
sure
you
have extra
keys.
I..
46
Door
Locks
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
Passengers-especially children-
can easily open the doors and fall
out. When a door is locked, the
inside handle won't open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through
an unlocked door when you slow
down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be
so
obvious: You
increase the chance
of
being
thrown out
of
the
vehicle
in
a crash
if
the
doors aren't locked. Wear
safety belts properly, lock your
doors, and you will be far better
off whenever you drive your
vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
From
the Outside:
Use your door key or Remote Keyless
Entry, if vour vehicle has this option. If
you have the Theft Deterrent System,
you
will also unlock and lock all doors
when you unlock
or
lock either front
door with your key.
From
the
Inside:
To
lock the door, slide the locking lever
rearward.
To
unlock the door, slide the locking
lever forward.
47
===
The lever
on
each rear door works only
that door's lock. It won't lock (or
unlock) all
of
the doors-that's a safety
feature.
Leaving
Your
Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, open your
door and set the locks from inside, then
get out and close the door.
If your vehicle has the Theft-Deterrent
System option, see
Zieft-Deterrent
System
later in this section.
Remote Keyless
Entry
(omoiy)
If your Pontiac has this option, you can
lock and unlock your doors or unlock
your trunk from about
15
feet
(4.5
m)
away using the key chain transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
Operation
The driver's door will unlock when
UNLOCK
is pressed. If pressed again
within
25
seconds, all doors will
unlock. All doors will lock when
LOCK
is pressed.
The trunk will unlock when the opened
trunk symbol is pressed, but only when
the ignition is off.
Press any button to illuminate the
interior lights (see the
Index
under
Illuminated Entry System).
Matching Transmitters to
Your
Vehicle
Each key chain transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from
unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer.
Remember to bring the remaining
transmitter with
you
when you
go
to
your dealer. When the dealer matches
the replacement transmitter to your
I
vehicle, the remaining transmitter must
also be matched. Once the new
~
transmitter
is
coded, the lost transmitter
will not unlock your vehicle.
.I.
48
You
can match a transmitter to as many
Aifferent vehicles as you own, provided
they are equipped with
exactly the same
model system.
(General Motors offers
several different models of these systems
on
their vehicles.) Each vehicle can have
only two transmitters matched to it. See
your dealer to match transmitters to
another vehicle.
Your
Remote Keyless Entry operates
on
a
radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules.
This device complies with
Part
15
of
the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1)
This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2)
This device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Should interference
to this system occur,
try this:
Check to determine if battery
replacement is necessary. See the
instructions on battery replacement.
Check the distance. You may be too
far from your vehicle. This product
has a maximum range.
Check the location. Other vehicles or
objects may be blocking the signal.
See
your Pontiac dealer or a qualified
technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system
by other than an authorized service
facility could void authorization to use
this equipment.
Battery
Replacement
Under normal use, the batteries in your
key chain transmitter should last about
two years.
You can tell the batteries are weak if the
transmitter won’t work at the normal
range in any location. If you have to get
close to your vehicle before the
transmitter works, it’s probably time to
change the batteries.
To
Replace Batteries in the Remote
Keyless Entry:
1.
Remove the screw from back cover.
2.
Lift the front cover
off,
bottom half first.
3.
Remove and replace the two batteries
4.
Reassemble the transmitter.
5.
Check the transmitter operation.
(2016).
49
r
m..
Features
4S
Controls
Rear
Door
Security Locks
Your Pontiac is equipped
with
rear door
security locks that help prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors
of
your vehicle from the inside. To use
one
of
these locks:
1.
Move the lever
on
the door all the
2.
Close the door.
way up to the
ENGAGED
position.
3.
Do
the same thing to the other rear
door lock.
50
The rear doors
of
your vehicle cannot
be
opened from inside when this feature is
in
use.
If
you want to open a rear door
when the security lock
is
on:
1.
Unlock the door from the inside.
!.
Then open the door from the outside.
f
you don’t cancel the security lock
eature, adults or older children who
,ide
in
the rear
won’t
be able to open
the
ear door from the inside. You should
et adults and older children know
how
hese security locks work, and how to
:ancel the locks.
To
cancel the rear door lock:
1.
Unlock the door from the inside and
open the door from the outside.
2.
Move the lever all the way down.
3.
Do
the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work
normally.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially
in some cities. Although your Pontiac
has a number
of
theft-deterrent features,
we know that nothing we put
on
it can
make it impossible to steal. However,
there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition:
If
you walk away from your vehicle with
the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy
riders or professional thieves-so don’t
do
it.
When you park your Pontiac and
open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a tone
reminding you
to
remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. Always
do
this. Your steering wheel will be
locked, and
so
will your ignition and
transaxle.
51
Features
&
Controls
Theft
(CONI)
Parking
at
Night:
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows
and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep
your valuables out of sight. Put them in
a storage area, or take them with you.
Parking
Lots:
If
you park in a lot where someone will
be watching your vehicle, it’s best to
lock it up and take your keys. But what
if you have to leave your ignition key?
What
if
you have to leave something
valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area,
Lock the glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key with you.
like your trunk or glove box.
52
PASS-Key
/ITM
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-
Key
IFM
(Personalized Automotive
Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key
IFM
is a passive theft-
deterrent system. This means you don’t
have to do anything to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you insert
or
remove the key from the ignition. PASS-
KeyTM uses a resistor pellet in the
ignition key that matches a decoder in
your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key
IFM
system senses
that someone is using the wrong key, it
shuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel
systems. For about
three
minutes, the
starter won’t work and fuel won’t go to
the engine.
If
someone tries to start your
vehicle again
or
uses another key during
this time, the vehicle will not start. This
discourages someone from randomly
trying different keys with different
resistor pellets in an attempt to make
a
match.
The ignition key must be clean and dry
before it’s inserted
in
the ignition or the
engine may not
start.
If
the engine does not start and the
SECURITY
light is on, the key may be
dirty or wet.
Turn
the ignition
off.
Clean and dry the key. Wait about three
minutes and try again. The security light
may remain on during this time.
If
the
starter still won’t work, and the key
appears
to
be clean and dry, wait about
three minutes and try the other ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to
check the fuse (see the
Index
under
Fuses
&
Circuit
Breakers).
If
the starter
won’t work with the other key, your
vehicle needs service.
If
your vehicle
does
start,
the first ignition key may be
faulty. See your Pontiac dealer or
a
locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key
IITM
If
you accidentally use a key that has a
damaged or missing resistor pellet, the
starter won’t work and the
SECURITY
light will flash. But you don’t have to
wait three minutes before trying one of
the other ignition keys.
See
your Pontiac
dealer or a locksmith who can service
the PASS-Key
IITM
to have a new key
made.
If
you’re ever driving and the
SECURITY
light comes
on
and
remains on, you will be able to restart
your engine if you
turn
it
off.
Your
PASS-Key
II?
system, however, is not
working properly and must be serviced
by your Pontiae dealer. Your vehicle is
not protected by the PASS-Key
IFM
system.
If
you
lose or damage a PASS-Key
IFM
ignition key,
see
your Pontiac dealer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-
Key
IFM
to have a new key made.
Theft-Deterrent
System
(omoN)
If
your Pontiac
has
this option, it has a
theft-deterrent alarm system. With this
system, the
SECURITY
light will flash
when you open the door (if your ignition
is
off).
This
light reminds you to arm the theft-
deterrent system when leaving your
vehicle.
To
Arm
the
System:
1.
Open the door.
2.
Lock
the door with the power door
lock switch or Keyless Entry
transmitter. The
SECURITY
light
should come on and stay on.
3.
Close all
doors.
The
SECURITY
light
will
go
off
after about
30
seconds
and the system will then be armed.
53
Features
&
Controls
Theft-Deterrent System
(CONI:)
If the
SECURITY
light comes on for
one minute and then shuts off while the
ignition is on, the security system has
detected a problem with itself. See your
dealer for service.
If a door or the trunk is opened without
the key or the Keyless Entry transmitter,
the alarm will go off.
It
will also go
off
if the trunk lock is damaged
or
if the
ignition
is
turned on. Your vehicle’s
lights will flash and the horn will sound
for three minutes, then will go
off
to
save battery power. And your vehicle
will not
start.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system
won’t arm if you lock the doors with a
key or manual door lock.
It
arms only if
you use a power door lock switch or
Keyless Entry transmitter.
To Avoid Setting
Off
the Alarm
by
Accident:
If you don’t want to arm the theft-
deterrent system, the vehicle should be
locked with a key
after
the doors are
closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use
the Keyless Entry System transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set
off
the
alarm.
To
Stop the Alarm:
If
you set off the alarm by accident,
unlock any door with your key.
You
can
also turn off the alarm by pressing the
UNLOCK
button on the Keyless Entry
System transmitter. The
alarm
won’t
stop if you try to unlock
a
door any
other way.
..I
54
To
Test
the
Almn:
Roll
pur
window down,
then
follow the
directions under
221
Am
the System
earlier. Once
tbe
alarm
is set, reach
through the
window
and manually
unlock
the
door
from
the inside or
turn
on
the
ignition. The alarm
should
sound.
If
the
dam
does
not
sound when it
should,
check to see if your horn works.
The
horn
fuse
may be
Mown.
Ta replace
the
fuse,
see the
Index
under
FEares
&
Circuit Breakers.
To
reduce
the
possibility
of
theft,
always
arm
the theft-deterrent
system
when
leaving your vehicle.
tIEumhated
Enfry
Spkm
~~KNW)
When
you
lift the lever
of
either front
door, a light will glow
around
the door
lock. This
will
help you
insert
the door
key
at night.
The
lights inside your vehicle will
also
go
on. These lights will
go
off
after
about
20
seconds, or when
you
start
your
engine.
These lights will
also
go
on
when you press my button on the
optional Remote Keyless
Entry
transmitter.
If
a
door
is
left ajar, your interior lights
will
turn
off
after
ten minutes to
save
your battery.
H2344
I
Trunk
hk
Ta
unlock the trunk from the outside,
insert
the door key
and
turn
it.
55
Remote Trunk Release
(opTIoN)
Press the trunk release button located
below the driver’s door armrest
to
release the trunk lid. The ignition must
be
on
and
the
transaxle must be
in
P
(Park).
The system also works with the Remote
Keyless Entry System.
Convenience Net
(OPTION)
Your vehicle may have a convenience
net. You’ll see it just inside the back
wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags,
behind
the
net
to
help keep them from
falling over during sharp turns or quick
starts
and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads.
Store them in the trunk as far forward as
you can.
You can unhook the
net
so
that it will lie
flat when
you’re
not
using it.
Glove
Box
Use the door key to lock and unlock the
glove box.
To
open, lift the latch release
on
the left side of the glove box door.
There’s a special shelf inside for storing
this manual.
m..
56
New
Venice
bbBreak-ln”
Your modern Pontiac doesn’t need
an elaborate “break-in.” But it will
perform better
in
the long run if
you
follow these guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed-
fast or slow-for the first
500
.miles
(804
km).
Don’t make full-
throttle
starts.
Avoid making hard stops for
the
first
200
miles
(322
km)
or
so.
During this time your new brake
linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard
stops
with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
“breaking-in” guideline every
time you get
new
brake linings.
Ignition Switch
With the ignition key
in
the ignition switch,
you
can
turn
the switch to
five
positions:
Accessory:
An “on” position in which
you can operate your electrical power
accessories. Press in the ignition switch
as
you
turn the top
of
it toward you.
Lock:
The only position in which
you
can remove the key. This locks your
steering wheel, ignition and transaxle.
Off:
Unlocks the steering wheel,
ignition, and transaxle, but does not
send electrical power to any accessories.
Use
this position if your vehicle
must
be
pushed or towed, but never try to push-
start
your vehicle.
A
warning chime will
sound if you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is
off
and
the
key is in
the ignition.
Run:
An “on” position to which the
switch returns after you
start
your
engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in the
Run
position when
the engine is running. But even when
the engine is not running, you can use
Run
to operate your electrical power
accessories, and to display some
instrument panel warning lights.
Start:
Starts
the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The
ignition switch will return to
Run
for
normal driving.
Note that even if the engine
is
not
running, the positions
Accessory
and
Run
are
“on”
positions that allow you
to operate your electrical accessories,
such as the radio.
Key Reminder Warning
If
you leave your key in the ignition, in
the
Off
position, you will hear a
warning tone when you open the driver’s
door.
57
===
3800 Tuned Port Injection Engine
(Code
L):
3,
If
it
doesn’t start right away, hold
your key in
Start
for about three
seconds at a time
until
your engine
starts. Wait about
15
seconds between
each
try
to help avoid draining your
battery.
3800 Supercharged Engine (Code
1):
3.
If it doesn’t start right away, hold
your key
in
Start
for about three to
five seconds at a time until
your
engine starts. Wait about
15
seconds
between each
try
to help avoid
draining your battery.
Holding your key in
Start
for
longer than
15
seconds at
a
time
will cause your battery
to
be
I
drained much sooner.-And the
excessive heat
can
damage your
I
starter
motor.
I
4.
If your engine still won’t
start
(or
starts but then stops), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline.
Try
pushing your accelerator pedal
all
the
way to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key
in
Start
for about
three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but
then
stops again,
do
the
same thing, but this time keep the
pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline
from
the engine. After
waiting
about
15
seconds, repeat the normal starting
procedure.
53
Features
&
Controls
Driving Through Deep Standing
Water
..
-
.
If
you
drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water,
water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly
damage
your
engine.
If
you
can’t
avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very
slowly.
Engine
Block
Heater
(opTIoN)
In very cold weather,
0°F
(-18”
C)
or
colder,
the
engine block heater can help.
You’ll get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
To
Use
the
Block
Heater:
1
.
Turn
off
the engine.
2.
Open the hood and unwrap the
3.
Plug it into a normal, grounded
electrical cord.
110-volt outlet.
b!!
A
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause
an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured.
Plug the cord into a properly
grounded three-prong 110-volt
outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use
a heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
...
60
‘--
Transaxle
Shiftins the Automatic
I
After you’ve used the block heater,
__
be sure to store the cord as it was
column. Both are shown.
it could be damaged.
between the seats or on the steering
moving engine parts. If
you
don’t,
shift lever located on the console
before, to keep it away from
Your automatic transaxle may have a
How
long should you keep the block
Ieater plugged
in?
The answer depends
In
the weather, the
kind
of
oil
you have,
md some other things. Instead of trying
:o
list everything here, we ask
that
you
:ontact a Pontiac dealer
in
the area
ahere you’ll be parking your vehicle.
The dealer can give you the best advice
For that particular area.
There are several shift positions.
In
this
manual, these are referred to
by
the
commonly used symbols
in
the right
column below:
Park
Reverse
Neutral
Overdrive
Drive
Second
First
P
R
N
IDI
D
2
1
61
5
&
Controls
Park
P
(Park):
This locks your front wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
1
It
is
dangerous
to
get
out
of
your
vehicle
if
the
shift
lever
is
not
my
in
Don’t
leave
your vehicle when the engine
is
running unless you
have
to.
If
you
have
left
the
engine
running,
the
vehicle
can
move
suddenly.
You
or
others
could
be
injured.
To
be
sure
your
vehicIe
won’t
move,
even
when
you’re
on
fkirly level
ground,
always
set
your
parking
brake
and
move
the
shift
lever
to
P
(Fark).
See
the
Inda
under
Shiping
into
P
(Park).
If
you
are
parking
on
a
hill,
or
if
you’re
pulling
a trailer,
also
see
the
Inda
under
Parking
on
HilZs
or
Towing
a
llailer.
-
P
(park)
with
the
parking
brake
firmly
set.
Your
vehicle
can
roll.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in
P
(Park)
range before starting the engine. Your
Pontiac has a brake-transaxle shift
interlock. You have to fully
apply
your
regular brakes
before
you can shift from
P
(Park) when the ignition key is in the
On
position.
If
you cannot shift out
of
P
(Park), ease pressure
on
the shift
lever-push the shift lever all the way
into
P
(Park) and also release the shift
lever button
on
floor shift console
models
as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift lever
into the gear you wish. (Press the shift
lever button before moving the shift
lever on floor shift console models.) See
Shifting
Out
of
P
(Park}
later in this
section.
I..
62
Severse
R
(Reverse):
Use this gear to back up.
Shifting to
R
(Reverse) while your
vehicle
is
moving forward could
damage your transaxle. Shift to
R
only after your vehicle is stopped.
To
rock your vehicle back and forth to
get out
of
snow, ice, or sand without
damaging your transaxle, see the
Index
under
If
You
’re
Stuck:
In
Sand, Mud,
Ice,
or
Sy10w.
r
Neutral
N
(Neutral):
In this position, your
engine doesn’t connect
with
the wheels.
To
restart
when
you’re already moving,
use
N
(Neutral) only.
Also,
use
N
when
your vehicle
is
being towed.
63
..I
“r
Controls
I
Neutral
(CONTJ
Shifting out
of
P
(Park) or
N
(Neutral) while your engine
is
I
“racing” (running at high speed)
i:
’
ngerous. Unless your foot is
I
llrmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You
could lose control and
hit
people
or objects. Don’t shift out
of
P
(Park) or
N
(Neutral) whill- --~ur
engine
is
racin-
Damage to your transaxle caused
by shifting out
of
P
(Park) or
N
(Neutral) with the engine racing
isn’t covered by your warranty.
Forward Gears
(Automatic
Overdrive):
This
position
is
for normal driving.
If
you
need more power for passing, and
you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about
halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (56
h/h)
or
more, push the accelerator all the way
down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and
have more power.
...
64
If your vehicle seems to
start
up
rather slowly, or if it seems not to
shift gears
as
you
go faster,
something may be wrong with a
transaxle system sensor. If you
drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged.
So,
if
this
happens, have your vehicle
serviced right away. Until
then,
you can use
2
(Second Gear) when
vou are driving less than
35
mDh
i56
km/h) anza
(0
higher speeds.
D
(Third
Gear):
This is like
,
but
you
never go into Overdrive. Here are
some times you might choose
D
instead
When driving on
hilly,
winding roads.
When towing a trailer,
so
there is less
When going down
a
steep hill.
2
(Second Gear):
This
position gives
you more power but lower fuel
economy.
You
can use
2
on hills. It can
help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes
off
and on.
ofm:
shifting between gears.
r
Don't drive
in
2
(Second
Gear)
for
I
more than
5
miles
(8
km),
or
at
speeds over
55
mph
(88
km/h), or
you
can
damage your transaxle. Use
or
D
as much
as
possible.
Don't shift into
2
unless
you
are
going slower than
65
mph
(105
km/h), or
you
can damage
your engine.
65
mmm
Features
&
Controls
Forward Gears
(CONT.)
1
(First
Gear):
This position gives you
even more power (but lower fuel
economy) than
2.
You
can use it on very
steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud.
If
the selector lever is put in
1,
the
transaxle won’t shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
66
If your front wheels can’t rotate,
don’t try to drive. This might
happen if you were stuck
in
very
deep sand or mud or were up
against a solid object. You could
damage your transaxle.
Also,
if
you stop when going uphill,
don’t hold your vehicle there with
only the accelerator pedal. This
could overheat and damage the
transaxle.
Use
your brakes or shift
into
P
(Park) to hold your vehicle
in position
on
a hill.
Performance Shifting
(opTIoN)
Press
PERFORM
SHIFT
to allow the
transaxle to shift at higher engine
speeds, increasing acceleration
performance. An indicator light on the
switch will glow when performance
shifting is in operation.
Downshifts will occur at a lower
percentage
of
accelerator application
while you’re in the
PERFORM
SHIFT
mode.
Press
NORMAL
SHIFT
to have the
transaxle shift at lower engine speeds,
increasing fuel economy. An indicator
light on the switch will glow when
normal shifting is in operation.
L-
Parking
Brake
To
Set the Parking Brake:
Hold the regular brake pedal down with
your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with
your
left foot.
If
the
ignition
is
on, the brake system warning
light will come on.
A
chime will sound
after the vehicle has traveled
46
feet
(14
meters),
To Release the Parking Brake:
Hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull
the
BRAKE
RELEASE
lever.
If
you
try
to drive off with the parking brake
on,
the brake light stays on and a chime
sounds until you release the parking
brake or recycle the ignition.
If
You
are on a Hill:
See the
Index
under
Parking
on
Hitls.
That section shows how to turn your
front wheels.
If
You
are Towing a Trailer and are
Parking on
Any
Hill:
See the
Index
under
Towing a Trailer.
That section shows what to do
first
to
keep the trailer from moving.
67
c
...
Features
&
Controls
1
Shifting
Znto
P
(Park)
It can be dangerous to get
out
~
b
of your vehicle if
the
shift
lever is not fully
in
P
(Park) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
If
you have left
the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured.
To
be sure your
vehicle won’t move, when you’re
on fairly level ground, use the
steps that follow. If you are parking
on a hill, or if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see the
Index
under
rking
on Hills
or
Towing
a
rrailer.
Steering
Column
Shift Lever
1.
Hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot and set the parking brake.
2.
Move the shift lever into the
P
(Park)
position as follows:
Pull the lever toward you.
68
Move the lever
up
as
far
as it will go.
3.
Move the ignition key to
Lock.
4.
Remove the key and take it with you.
If
you
can walk away from your
vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle
is
in
P
(Park).
Console
ShiR
Lever
1.
Hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot and set the parking brake.
2.
Move the
shift
lever into
P
(Park)
position like this:
Hold in the button
on
the lever.
Push the lever all the way toward
the front of your vehicle.
3.
Move the ignition key to
Lock.
4.
Remove the key and
take
it with
you.
If
you
can walk away from your
vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand,
your
vehicle is in
P
(Park).
69
Features
&
Controls
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
It is dangerous to leave your
\
vehicle with the engine
nning. Your vehicle could move
ddenly if the shift lever is not
dy
in
P
(Park)
with
the parking
brake firmly set. And, if
you
leave
the vehicle with the engine
running,
it
could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Don’t leave your vehicle
with the engine running unless you
have to.
I
If you have
to
leave your vehicle with
the
engine running, be sure your vehicle
is in
P
(Park) and your parking brake is
firmly set before you leave
it.
After
you’ve moved the shift lever into the
P
(Park) position, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from
P
(Park)
without first pulling it toward you (or, if
you have the console shift lever, without
first pushing the button).
If
you can,
it
means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into
P
(Park).
70
Shifting Out
of
P (Park)
Your Pontiac has a brake-transaxle shift
interlock. You have to fully
apply
your
regular brakes
before
you can shift from
P
(Park) when the ignition is in the
On
position. See the
Index
under
Shifting
the Automatic Transaxle.
If
you cannot shift out of
P
(Park), ease
pressure
on
the shift lever-push the
shift lever all the way into
P
(Park) and
also release the shift lever button on
floor shift console models as you
maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you wish.
(Press the shift lever button before
moving the shift lever on floor shift
console models.)
If
you
ever hold the
brake pedal down but still can’t shift out
of
P
(Park),
try
this:
1.
Turn the key to
Off.
Open and close
the driver’s door to
turn
off the
Retained Accessory Power feature.
2.
Apply and hold the brake until the
end of Step
4.
3.
Shift to
N
(Neutral).
4.
Start the vehicle and then shift to the
drive gear you want.
5.
Have the vehicle fixed as
soon
as you
can.
I
CAUTION
I
A
Things that can burn could
touch hot exhaust parts under
your vehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves,
dry
grass or
other things that can burn.
A
Engine exhaust can
kill.
It contains the gas carbon
monoxide
(eo),
which you can't see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
0
Your exhaust system
sounds
strange
or
different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0
Your
vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your
vehicle was damaged
when
driving over high points
on
the
road
or
0
Repairs
weren't done correctly.
*
Your
vehicle or exhaust system has been
modified
improperly.
If
you
ever
suspect
exhaust
is
coming
into your vehicle:
0
Drive
it
only with all the windows down to blow
out
any
CO;
and
0
Have it fixed
immediately.
over
road debris.
I
r
Features
&
Controls
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
It’s
better not to park with
the
engine running. But
if
you ever have to, here are
I
some things to know.
II
Idling
the
engine
with
the air system control
OFF
could allow dangerous
xhaust
into
your vehicle (see the earlier
CAUTION
under
Engine Exhaust).
‘
so,
idling
in
a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide
(CO)
into
your vehicle even
if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust-with CO-can come
in
easily.
Never
park
in
a
garage
with
the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. (See
the
Index
under
Bliaard.)
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the shift lever is not fully
in
P
(Park)
with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave
your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve
left
the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured.
To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake and move
the
shift lever
to
P
(Park).
If
you are parking on a hill, or
if
you’re pulling a trailer, also see the
Zndex
under
Parking
on
Hills
or
Towing
a
Truik
rn.1
72
Horn
You
can sound the
horn
by
pressing the
horn
symbols
on your steering
wheel,
Tilt Steering Wheel
A
tilt steering wheel allows
you
to
adjust the steering wheel before you
drive. You can
also
raise
it
to the highest
level to give your legs more room when
you
exit
and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering
wheel and
pull
the lever. Move the
steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever
to
lock the wheel
in
place.
Power
Windows
Switches on the driver’s armrest control
each
of
the windows when the ignition
is
on.
In
addition, each passenger door
has a control switch for its own window.
When the driver’s window switch is
held rearward for more than a half
second, the window will lower
completely. The window can be opened
in smaller amounts by pressing the
switch rearward and releasing it
immediately.
To
stop the window while
it
is lowering,
press the switch again, then release.
To
raise the window, hold the switch
forward.
r
Turn
SignallHeadlight
Beam
Lever
The lever on the left side of
the
steering
column includes your:
Headlight High-Low Beam
Headlight Washers
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
0
Cruise Control (Option)
Turn Signal and Lane Change
The High-Low Beam feature is
discussed under
Headlights.
See the
Index
under
Headlights.
(SSE
and SSEi only)
Indicator
73
==.
t
Features
&
Controls
Turn Signal and Lane Change
Indicator
The turn signal has two upward (for
Right) and two downward (for Left)
positions. These positions allow you to
signal a turn or a lane change.
To
signal a turn, move the lever all the
way up or down. When the turn is
finished, the lever will return
automatically.
A
green arrow
on
the instrument panel
will flash in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
To
signal a lane change, just raise or
lower the lever until the green arrow
starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever
will return by itself when you release
it.
As
you signal a turn
or
a lane change, if
the arrows don’t flash but just stay
on,
a
signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If
you
have the Driver Information Center, it
will tell you if you have a burned out
bulb. See the
Index
under
Driver
Information
Center.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help
avoid an accident.
If
the green arrows
don’t go on at all when you signal a
turn, check the fuse (see the
Index
under
Fuses
&
Circuit Breakers)
and for
burned-out bulbs.
If
you have a trailer towing option with
added wiring for the trailer lights, a
different
turn
signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal
indicator will flash even if a
turn
signal
bulb is burned out. Check the front and
rear turn signal lights regularly to make
sure they are working.
...
74
..
c
L
Windshield
Wipers
You
control the windshield wipers by
turning the band marked
WIPER.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band
to
MIST.
Hold
it there until the wipers
start,
then let
go.
The wipers will stop
after one cycle. If you want
more
cycles,
hold the band on
MIST
longer.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the
band away from you
to
the
LO
position.
For high speed wiping, turn the band
further, to
HI.
To
stop the wipers, move
the band to
OFF.
You
can set the wiper speed for a long
or short delay between wipes. This can
be
very
useful
in
light rain or snow.
Turn the band
to
choose the delay time.
The closer to
LO,
the shorter the
delay.
A
Damaged wiper blades may
prevent
you
from seeing well
enough
to
drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and
snow from
the
wiper blades before
using
them.
If
they’re frozen
to
the
windshield, carefully loosen
or
thaw them.
If
your blades
do
become damaged, get
new
blades
or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your
wipers.
A
circuit breaker will stop them
until the motor cools. Clear away snow
or ice to prevent an overload.
75
...
Windshield Washer
At the top of the turn signal/high beam
lever there’s a paddle with the word
PUSH
on it. To spray washer fluid on
the windshield, push the paddle for less
than a second. The wipers will clear the
window and then either stop or return to
your preset speed. For more washer
cycles, push and hold the paddle.
Some models have a
WASHER
FLUID
warning, that indicates if the fluid level
in the windshield washer is low. See the
Index
under
Low
Washer Fluid Warning
Light.
When using concentrated washer
fluid, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-
use washer fluid. Water can
cause the solution
to
freeze an
’
damage your washer fluid
tank
and other
parts
of
the washer
system.
Also,
water doesn’t clean
as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid
tank
only
%
full
when it’s
very
cold. This
allows for expansion, which
could damage the
tank
if
it
is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in
your windshield washer. It can
damage your washer system and
paint.
Y
Headlight Washers
(opT1oN)
If
you have this option,
you
can wash
your headlights
in
bad weather or
whenever desired. Here’s how:
To operate the headlight washers, the
ignition must be on. Pull the paddle on
the turn signal/headlight beam lever
labeled
PULL.
Each headlight
will
get
a spray
of
washer fluid.
H
Cruise
Control
(OPTION)
With cruise control, you can maintain a
speed of about
25
mph
(40
h/h) or
more without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help
on
long
trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds
1
below about
25
mph
(40
km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise
control shuts
off.
Cruise control can
be
-
b
dangerous where
you
can’t
drive safely at a steady speed.
So,
don’t use your cruise control
on
winding roads
or
in
heavy
traffic.
,Cruise
control can
be
dangerous
on
slippery roads.
On
such
roads,
fast
changes
in
tire
traction can cause needless wheel
spinning,
and you could
lose
control.
Don’t
use
cruise control
on
slippery mads.
77
Features
&
Controls
To
Set Cruise Control
1.
Move
the
cruise control switch to
ON.
I
CAUlfON
A
If
you
leave your cruise
control switch
ON
when
u’re not using cruise,
you
might
hit
a
button and go into cruise
when
you
don’t want
to.
You
could
be
startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch
OFF
until you want to use it.
2.
Get up to the speed you want.
78
3.
Push in the
SET
button at the end of
4.
Take your
foot
off the accelerator
the lever and release
it.
pedal.
To
Resume
a
Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at
a
desired speed and then you apply the
brake. This,
of
course, shuts
off
the
cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it. Once you’re going about
25
mph
(40
b/h)
or more, you can
move the cruise control switch from
ON
to
R/A
(which stands for Resume/
Accelerate) for about half a second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen
speed and stay there.
r
If you hold the switch at
R/A
A
longer than half a second, the
vehicle will keep going faster until
you release
the
switch or apply the
brake.
You
could be startled and
even lose control.
So
unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the
switch at
R/A.
To
Increase Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher
speed. Here’s the first:
1
.
Use the accelerator pedal to get
to
the
2.
Push the button at the end of the
higher speed.
lever, then release the button and the
accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise
at
the
higher speed.
Here’s the second way to go to a higher
speed:
Move the cruise switch from
ON
to
R/A.
Hold it there until you get up
to
the speed you want, and then release
the switch.
To
increase your speed in
very
small
amounts, move the switch to
RIA
for
less than half a second and then
release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will
go
about
1
mph
(1.6
km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work
after you turn on the cruise control by
pushing the
SET
button.
79
888
Features
&
Controls
To
Reduce Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your
speed while using cruise control:
Push in the button at the end
of
the
lever until you reach the lower speed
you want, then release it.
To
slow down in very small amounts,
push the button for less than half a
second. Each time you do this, you’ll
go
1
mph
(1.6
km/h) slower.
BO
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase
your speed. When you take your foot
off
the pedal, your vehicle will slow down
to the cruise control speed you set
earlier.
Using Cruise Control
on
Hills
How well your cruise control will work
on hills depends upon your speed, load,
and the steepness of the hills. When
going up steep hills, you
may
have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain
your speed. When going downhill,
you
may have to brake or
shift
to a lower
gear to keep your speed down. Of
course, applying the brake takes you out
of
cruise control. Many drivers find this
to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
To
Get Out
of
Cruise Control
To
Erase Cruise Speed Memory
There are two ways to turn
off
the cruise When you turn
off
the
cruise control or
control: the ignition, or shift into
P
(Park), your
Step lightly on the brake pedal;
OR
cruise control set speed is
Move the cruise switch to
OFF.
When the Traction Control System is
turned on,
it
will turn
off
the cruise
control. See the
Index
under
Tractiorz
Control.
erased.
Light Controls
Parking Lights:
Pull the switch to the first stop to turn on:
Parking Lights
Side Marker Lights
Taillights
Instrument Panel Lights
Headlights:
Pull the switch out all the way to turn
on
the headlights, together with:
Parking Lights
Side Marker Lights
Taillights
Instrument Panel Lights
Push the switch in all the way to turn all
the lights
off.
81
...
Features
&
Controls
Operation
of
lights
'
Although your vehicle's lighting system
(headlamps, parking lamps, fog lamps,
side marker lamps and tail lamps) meets
all applicable federal lighting
requirements, certain states and
provinces may apply their own lighting
regulations that may require special
attention before you operate these
lamps. For example, some jurisdictions
may require that you operate your lower
beam lamps with fog lamps at all times,
62
or that headlamps be turned on
whenever you must use your windshield
wipers. In addition, most jurisdictions
prohibit driving solely with parking
lamps, especially at dawn or dusk. It is
recommended that you check with your
own state or provincial highway
authority for applicable lighting
regulations.
lights On Reminder
If
you open the door while leaving the
lights on, you will hear a warning tone.
Daytime Running Lights
(CANADA
ONLY)
The Canadian federal government has
decided that Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are a useful feature,
in
that DRL
can make your vehicle more visible
to
pedestrians and other drivers during
daylight hours. DRL are required
on
new vehicles sold
in
Canada.
Your DRL work
with
a light sensor on
top of the instrument panel. Don't cover
it
up. The low beam headlights will
come on at reduced brightness
in
daylight when:
The ignition is on
The headlight switch is off, and
The transaxle is not
in
P
(Park).
At dusk, the exterior lights will come on
automatically and the low beams will
change
to
full brightness.
At
dawn,
the
exterior lights will go out and the low
beams
will
change to the reduced
brightness of DRL
(if
the headlight
switch
is
off)..
Of course, you may still turn on the
headlights any time
you
need to.
To idle your vehicle
with
the DRL off,
shift the transaxle into
P
(Park). The
DRL
will stay off until you shift out of
P
(Park).
At
night, you can turn off all exterior
lights
when
you are
in
P
(Park) by
moving the Twilight Sentinel control all
the way past
MIN
to
turn
it
off, if
it
was
on.
If
it
was off, move the control to the
right to turn
it
on, then back off. The
lights will come back on
when
you put
the transaxle
in
gear.
I
r
Headlight High-Low
Beam
Changer
To
change the headlights from low beam
to high, or high
to
low, pull the turn
signal lever all the way toward you.
Then release it.
When the high beams are
on,
a blue
light
on
the instrument panel also will
be
on.
83
...
Features
&
Controls
Instrument Panel Intensity
Control
You
can brighten or dim your
instrument cluster lights by rotating the
headlight switch. Rotate the switch all
the way counterclockwise to turn on the
interior courtesy lights. Rotate the
switch clockwise to turn off the
instrument cluster lights and displays.
~
Twilight Sentinel
(opTIoN)
If
You
Have this Option, Here’s How
1.
Push in the headlight switch to turn
2.
Rotate the Twilight Sentinel switch
l
it
Works:
your headlights off.
counterclockwise from
OFF.
The Twilight Sentinel Does Two
Things:
First,
depending on how dark
it
becomes outside, the Twilight Sentinel
turns your headlights on automatically,
when they’re needed. Avoid covering the
sensor located near the windshield, by
the defroster outlet-otherwise your
headlights will
stay
on.
Also, it’s possible that your headlights
might go out if you drove from a dark
area into
a
bright area, such as a lighted
parking lot. If this happens, turn on
your headlights with the regular
headlight switch.
mmm
84
Second,
to light your way when you
leave your vehicle, the Twilight Sentinel
will keep your headlights on for
as
long
as three minutes. Rotate the Twilight
Sentinel switch to
MAX
for a three-
minute delay, Rotate it the other way
to
reduce the delay.
Fog Lights
The switch for your fog lights is in the
overhead console.
An indicator light
in
the switch will
glow when the fog lights are switched
on.
Your headlights must be on low
beams, or your parking lights must be
on, for your fog lights to work.
Front Reading Ljghts
These lights and the interior courtesy
lights will come
on
when you open the
doors.
To turn on
a
reading light when the
doors are closed, press either switch.
Press it again to turn
the
light off.
To avoid draining your vehicle's battery,
be sure to turn off the reading lights
when leaving your vehicle.
Features
&
Controls
Rear Reading Lights
These overhead lights and the interior
courtesy lights will come on when
you
open the doors.
To
turn on the reading light when the
door
is
closed, slide the switch up. Slide
it down to turn off the light.
Inside Manual Day/Night
Rearview Mirror
To
reduce glare from lights behind you,
pull the lever toward you to the night
position.
Electrochromic DayINight
Rearview Mirror
This mirror automatically changes to
reduce glare when set in the
MIN
or
MAX
positions. One photocell
on
the
back
of
the mirror senses when
it
is
becoming dark outside. Another
photocell
is
built into the mirror surface
to sense headlights behind you.
The mirror will darken gradually to
reduce glare. This change may
take
a
few moments.
El
030
I
Setting the Sensitivity:
MIN:
The mirror will gradually reduce
glare when headlights behind you are
very close. This is a good position for
city driving, where there may be light
from many sources.
MAX:
The mirror will begin to
gradually reduce glare when headlights
are far behind you. This is
a
good
setting for rural driving.
The mirror goes to a clear position
whenever you shift to
R
(Reverse).
OFF:
Shuts off the Day/Night function.
The mirror will stay
in
the Day setting.
To keep the photocells operating well,
occasionally clean them with
a
cotton
swab and glass cleaner.
Convex
Outside
Mirror
Your right side mirror
is
convex.
A
convex mirror’s surface is curved
so
you
can see more from the driver’s seat.
r
-
If
you
aren’t
used
to
a convex
I
-
mirror,
you can hit another
vehicle.
A
convex mirror
can
make
things (like other vehicles)
look
farther
away
than they really
are.
If
you
cut
too
sharply
into
the
right
lane,
you
could hit
a
vehicle
on
your right.
Check
your
inside
mirror
or
glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
I
Manual
Remote
Control Mirror
The outside rearview
mirror
should
be
adjusted
so
you can just
see
the side
of
your vehicle when you are sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
Adjust the driver side outside mirror
with the control lever
on
the driver’s
door.
To
adjust your passenger side mirror, sit
in the driver’s seat and have a passenger
adjust the mirror for you.
I
D
Features
&
Controls
Power
Remote
Control Mirrors
(OPTION)
A control lever on the driver's door
controls both outside rearview mirrors.
Select the mirror you want to adjust
by
rotating the lever to the left or right.
Adjust each mirror
so
that you can just
see the side of your vehicle
when
you
are sitting
in
a comfortable driving
position.
When you operate the optional rear
window defogger, the outside rearview
mirrors are also heated to help clear
them of ice and snow.
Sun Visors
To block
out
glare, you can swing down
the visors. You can also remove them
from the center mount and swing them
to
the side, while the auxiliary sunshade
remains to block glare from the front.
laaria1
C2260
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Standard Mirror:
Open the cover to expose the vanity
mirror.
Lighted Mirrors:
If your vehicle has the optional lighted
vanity mirrors, the lights come
on
when
you open the cover. These can even be
used for reading.
You
can adjust the
brightness of the lights
with
the switch.
m..
88
e
t
r-
Express Open Sunroof
(OPTION)
Your express open sunroof provides an
airy, spacious feel to your vehicle's
interior and can also increase
ventilation.
It
includes a sliding glass
panel and a sliding sunshade. The
control switch will work only when the
ignition is
on,
or during Retained
Accessory Power, if you have that
option. See the
Index
under
Retained
Accessory Power.
To
Open the Sunroof:
Press the control switch rearward and
release it to open the glass panel and
sunshade. If you want to stop the
sunroof
in
a partially open position,
lightly press the switch again. Press the
switch rearward again to open fully. The
sunshade can also be opened by hand.
To
Close the
Sunroof:
Press and hold the control switch
forward to close the glass panel. The
sunshade can only be closed by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if your vehicle has an
electrical failure.
To
Open the Sunroof
Rear
Vent:
Press the control switch forward when
the sunroof is closed. Open
the
sunshade by hand.
To
Close the Sunroof Rear Vent:
Press the switch rearward.
L
Features
&
Controls
Storage Armrest
(OPTION)
Console
Shift
Models:
Press the button at the front edge to
open the armrest storage area for
cassette tapes, gloves, etc.
A
cup holder
flips
forward for use.
There’s also a bin for storage underneath
the armrest storage area.
Column
Shift
Models:
The front armrest opens into a storage
area for cassette tapes, gloves, etc.
To
open
it,
hold down the base and lift the
lid.
A
cup holder flips forward and
unfolds to hold two cups.
I..
so
c
Y
Door
Cup
Holder
The front doors provide space for
holding a
cup
or
soft
drink.
Rear Storage Compartment
Lift the rear of the armrest to reveal the
storage space.
Ashtrays
Pull
down
the interior door to access the Lift the cover to reveal the front ashtray.
trunk for storing long objects.
To
clean the ashtray, lift it out by pulling
on the snuffer.
91
...
Features
&
Controls
t
Ashtrays
(CONT.:)
On
models without a console, there’s
ashtraykup holder under
the
instruml
panel.
To
clean the ashtray, lift it out
pulling up on the tabs on either side.
snaps back into place.
an
ent
It
bY
To
open the rear ashtrays, lift the cover.
NOTICE
1
Don’t put papers and other things
that bum into your ashtrays.
If
you
do, cigarettes or other smoking
materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
I
1
V
.ighters
Yo
use a lighter, just push it
in
all the
vay and let go. When it’s ready, it will
bop back by itself.
I
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter
in
with your hand while it is heating.
If
you do, it won’t be able
to
back
away from the heating element
when it’s ready. That can make
it
overheat, damaging the lighter and
the heating element.
Sung/asses Storage
With the overhead console, you have
a
storage door for sunglasses. Press the
rear edge
of
the storage door to release
it.
Place your sunglasses inside the door.
To
close the door, raise
it
and press
it
into position.
Accessory Outlet
On
models with the overhead console,
there is a 12-volt outlet. Slide the cover
aside to access the outlet.
Adding
some
electrical equipment
to
your vehicle can damage it
or
keep other things from working
as
they should. This wouldn’t be
covered by
your
warranty.
Check
with
your
dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use
anything requiring more than
20
amps.
I
93
Features
&
Controls
H2379
r
The Instrument &ne/-
bur Information System
Your instrument panel is designed to let
you know at a glance how your vehicle
is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, how much fuel you’re using, and
many other things you’ll need to drive
safely and economically.
The main components of your
instrument panel are:
1.
Light Controls/Twilight Sentinel
2.
Side Vent
3.
Turn SignaUHeadlight Beam Lever
4.
Electronic Compass (Option)
(Option)
5.
Instrument Cluster
6.
Ignition Switch
7.
Driver Information Center (Option)
8.
Trip Odometer Reset
9.
Gage Cluster
Defogger
1
0.
Climate Controls/Rear Window
1 1
.
Lighter
i
2.
Temperature Sensor
1
3.
Glove Box
14.
Side Vents
1 5.
Center Vent
1
6.
Audio System
17.
Gear Shift Lever
1
8.
Ashtray
19.
Console Switch Bank (Option)
20.
Gain Control (Option)
21.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
22.
Horn
23.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
24.
Head-Up Display Control (Option)
25.
Parking Brake Release
26.
Hood Release
27.
Tilt Wheel Lever
(Option)
95
mmm
Features
&
Controls
Instrument Panel Clusters
Your Pontiac
is
equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters, which
includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following
pages. Be sure to read about those that apply to the instrument panel cluster for
your vehicle.
H2303
...
96
H
2312
Features
&
Controls
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your
speed in both miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour
(km/h).
The
odometer shows how far your vehicle
has
been driven,
in
either miles (used
in
the
U.S.)
or kilometers (used in
Canada).
The odometer and trip odometer are
displayed
in
the Driver Information
Center on vehicles
so
equipped.
Tamper Resistant Odometer
Your Pontiac has a tamper resistant
odometer. If you see silver lines
between the numbers, you’ll know that
someone has probably tried to turn
it
back,
so
the numbers may not be true.
You may wonder what happens if your
vehicle needs a new odometer installed.
If
the new one can be set to the mileage
total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero
and a label must be put on the driver’s
door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far
you have driven since you last reset it.
To
set
it
to zero:
On
vehicles with the Driver
Information Center, press the button
labeled
TRIP.
On vehicles with the Systems Monitor,
the button
is
next
to
the trip odometer.
Push
and release
in
a smooth,
continuous motion
until
all zeroes
appear.
c
Tachometer
(OFTION)
The tachometer shows your engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Do
not
run
your engine at speeds in the
red area.
Warning
Lights,
Gages
and
Indicators
This section describes the warning lights
and gages that may
be
on
your vehicle.
The pictures will help
you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something
is
wrong before it becomes
serious enough to cause an expensive
repair or replacement. Paying attention
to
your warning lights and gages could
also
save
you
or others from injury.
Warning lights go on when there may be
or
is a problem with one
of
your
vehicle’s functions.
As
you will see in
the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights
come
on briefly when
you
turn the ignition key just to let you
know they’re working.
If
you
are
familiar with this section,
you
should
not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may
be
or
is a problem with one
of
your vehicle’s
functions. Often gages
and
warning
lights work together to let
you
know
when there’s a problem
with
your
vehicle.
When one
of
the warning lights comes
on and stays
an
when
you
are driving,
or whtm one
of
the gages
shows
there
may be a problem, check the seetion
that tells you what
to
do about
it.
Please
follow the manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can
be
costly-and even
dangerous.
So
please get to know your
warning lights
and
gages. They’re a big
help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver
Information Center that
works
along with
the warning lights and gages. See the
Index
under
Driver
Information
Center.
9s
m..
...
Features
&
Controls
Warning
Lights
Your
Pontiac has some
of
the warning
light systems shown here. The symbols
are
explained
on
the
following
pages.
100
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light tells you that your engine
coolant has overheated
or
your radiator
cooling fans are
not
working. If you
have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, you should
pull off the road, stop your vehicle and
turn the engine
off
as
soon
as possible.
HOT
COOLANT
CAN
BURN YOU
BADLY!
In
Problems
on
the Road,
this
manual shows what to do. See the
Index
under
Engine Overheating.
Some clusters with gages do not have a
coolant temperature warning light.
In
those clusters a
CHECK
GAGES
warning light will alert you of a
potential coolant heating problem.
Low
Coolant Warning light
(OPT/ON)
If this light comes on,
your
system may
be low
on
coolant and the engine may
overheat. Check to see
if
the level
is
low, and add coolant if necessary. See
the
Index
under
Engine Coolant.
The
LOW
COOLANT
warning light
will also come on when
you
turn
on
the
ignition, but your engine is not running,
as a check to show you it is working.
If
it doesn’t come
on
then, have
it
fixed
right away.
101
Features
&
Controls
Oil
Warning
Light
If you have a problem with your oil, this
light may stay on after you
start
your
engine, or come on
when
you
are
driving. This indicates that oil is not
going through your engine quickly
enough to keep
it
cool. The engine
could be low
on
oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have
it
fixed right
away.
The oil light could also come
on
in two
other situations:
When the ignition is
on
but the engine
is not running, the light will come
on
as a test
to
show you it
is
working, but
the light will go out when you turn the
ignition to
Start.
If
it
doesn't come
on
with the ignition
on,
you may have a
problem with the fuse or bulb. Have
it
fixed right away.
If
you make a hard stop, the light may
come on for a moment. This is
normal.
Clusters with gages use
the
CHECK
GAGES
warning light to alert you of a
potential oil pressure problem.
4iU
I
JUN
Don't
keep
driving
if
the oil
pressure
is
low.
If
you do,
your
engine
can
become
so
hot
that
it
catches
fire.
You
or
others
could
be
burned.
Check your
oil
as
soon
as
possible
and
have
your vehicle
serviced.
[
Damage to your engine from,:
. ..
',
.
neglected oil problems can be
'
.I'
costly and is not covered by your
.,
,
,l
,
Check
Oii
Levei
Warning
Light
fO#-rn#)
This light indicates when the engine oil
level is
1
to
1%
quarts
(0.95
L
to
1.4
L)
low. It will go
on
for one to three
seconds when the ignition is turned to
the Run position, as a bulb check. It
will then
go
off. Even if you have
a
law
oil level, it will
go
off
for
15
to
20
seconds. Then, if the oil level
is
low,
and it has been at least eight minutes
since your engine was last running, the
CHECK
OIL
LEVEL
light will come
on for
20
to
40
seconds. The eight-
minute delay
allows
the majority of the
oil to drain back into the oil pan and
prevent a false low condition.
If
the
CHECK
OIL
LEVEL
warning
comes on, the oil level should be
checked at the oil dipstick. If the level is
low, the engine oil should
be
brought up
to the proper level (see the
Index
under
Engine
Oil).
After
restoring the proper
level and waiting for the eight-minute
drainback, the key can be
turned
to the
Run
position and the
CHECK
OIL
LEVEL
warning light should
only
come
on
as a bulb check.
Battery
Warning,Lighf
This light will come
on
briefly when
you
start
the vehicle,
as
a check to show
you it is
working,
then it should go out.
If
it
stays
on,
OF
comes on while
you
are
driving, you
may
have a problem with
the electrical charging system. It could
indicate that you have a loose generator
drive belt, or another electrical
problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is
on
could
drain your battery.
If
you
must drive
a
short distance with
the light
on,
be certain to turn
off
all
103
Features
&
Controls
Battery Warning Light
(CONI:)
your accessories, such as. the radio and
climate control system.
Some clusters with gages do
not
have a
battery warning light. They have a
CHECK
GAGES
warning
to
indicate a
problem. Vehicles with the supercharged
engine also have a similar battery
warning light.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
A
computer monitors operation
of
your
fuel, ignition and emission controls
systems. This light should come on
when the ignition is on but the engine is
not running, as a check to show you it is
working.
If
it
does not come on at all,
have it fixed right away.
If
it
stays on, or
it comes on while you are driving, the
computer is indicating that
you
have a
problem. You should take your vehicle
in for service soon.
am.
104
b
c
Low
Washer Fluid Warning Light
(OPTION)
This light will come on when your
windshield washers are working and the
fluid container
is
less than one-third
full.
Driving without washer
fluid
-
:an
be
dangerous.
A
bad mud
splash
can
block
your
vision.
You
could
collide
with
another vehicle.
Check
your
washer
fluid
often,
and
add
only
the
proper
fluid.
See
the
Idex
under
Windshiel$
Washer
Fluid.
I
I
Brake System Warning Light
Your Pontiac’s hydraulic brake system is
divided into two parts.
If
one part isn’t
working, the other part can still work
and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well. If the
warning light goes
on,
there could be a
brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
This light should come on as you start
the vehicle.
If
it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed
so
it
will be ready to warn
you
if
there’s a problem.
This light will also come
on
when
you
set your parking brake, and the light
will stay on if your parking brake
doesn’t release fully.
If
you
try
to
drive
off with the parking brake set, a chime
will also come on until you release the
parking brake. If the light and chime
stay
on
after your parking brake is
fully
released, it means you have a brake
problem.
If
the light and chime come on
while driving, pull off the road and stop
carefully.
You
may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light
is
still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See the
Index
under
Towing
Your
Pontiac.)
105
J
Features
Controls
Brake System Warning Light
(CONT.)
Your brake system
may
not be
working properly if the brake
warning light is on. Driving with
the brake warning light
on
can lead
to
an accident. If the light is still
on
after you’ve pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the
vehicle towed for service.
Anti-lock Brake System
Warning light
With anti-lock, this light will go on
when you start your engine and may stay
on for several seconds or
so.
That’s
normal. If the light doesn’t come on,
have it fixed
so
it will be ready to warn
you
if
there is a problem.
If
the light stays
on
or comes on when
you’re driving, stop as soon as possible
and turn the key off. Then start the engine
to reset the system.
If
the light still stays
on, or if it comes on again while you’re
driving, your Pontiac needs service.
Unless the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you will still have brakes,
but not anti-lock brakes.
If
the regular
mm.
106
c
Y
brake system warning light is also on,
see the
Index
under
Brake
System
Warning Light.
The anti-lock brake system warning
light may also come on when you are
driving with a compact spare tire.
If
this
happens, the light means you won’t have
anti-lock until you replace the compact
spare with a full-size tire.
If
the warning
light stays
on
after you replace the
compact spare with a full-size tire, or
comes
on
again while you are driving,
your Pontiac needs service.
L
Traction Control System Warning
Light
(OPTION)
The
TRACTION
OFF
warning
light
means that the system is not working.
This warning light may come on for the
following reasons:
If your transaxle overheats, the
traction control system automatically
shuts off
until
the transaxle cools. The
warning light will come on and stay
on during that time.
If your brakes overheat, the traction
control system will go off and the
warning light will come
on
until
your
brakes cool down. The warning light
will come on for varying periods of
time.
If you turn the system off by pressing
the switch on the center console while
the vehicle is stopped, the warning
light will come on and stay on. To
turn the system back on, bring the
vehicle to
a
stop and press the switch
again. The warning light should go
off. The system will also turn itself on
if
you turn your ignition off and back
on again.
If the
TRACTION
OFF
warning
light comes on and stays on for an
extended period
of
time, even when
you've switched the system on, your
vehicle needs service.
If
you
let
your
tires
spin
at
high
sped
when
the
TRACTION
OFF
warning
light
is
on,
they
can
explode
and
you
or
othm
could
be
injured.
And,
spinning
your
tires
with
the
TRACTION
OFF'
warning
light
on
can
cause
the
transaxle
to
overheat
or
can
cause
other
problems.
That
could
cause
an
engine
fire
or
other
damage.
When
you're
stuck,
spin
the
wheels
as
little
as
possible. Don't
spin
the
wheels
above
35
mph
(56
h/h)
as
shown
on
the
speedometer.
e
..I
.
Features
&
Controls
Id
Traction Control System Warning
Light
(CONT.)
108
rn
Gages
Your Pontiac may have many
of
the
following gages. Be sure to read about
the ones that came with your vehicle.
Check
Gage5
Warning
Light
(OPTION)
This light will
come
on
briefly when
you
are
starting the engine.
If
the light
comes
on
and
stays
on while you
are
driving, check your gages
for
fuel,
coolant temperature,
oil
pressure or
voltage.
This
light will
stay
on
if your
engine
is
not
running.
Fuel Gage
You will either have this fuel gage or
one very similar. Your fuel gage tells
you about how much fuel you have left,
when
the
ignition is on. When the gage
reads in the yellow band, a warning
chime will sound and the
CHECK
GAGES
warning light will go on,
if
you
have it.
Here are five things that some owners
ask about. None of these show a
problem with your fuel gage:
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts
off before the gage reads
F
(Full).
It takes a little more or less fuel
to
fill
up than the gage indicated. For
example, the gage may have indicated
the
tank
was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the
tank's capacity to fill the tank.
The gage moves a little when you
turn
a corner or speed up.
The gage doesn't go back to
E
(Empty)
when you turn off the ignition.
If
you have the large span
(220")
gage,
the needle moves more for a given
amount
of
fuel. This does not indicate
excessive fuel consumption, and is
normal.
For your fuel
tank
capacity, see
Sewice
Station Informution
on the last page
of
this manual.
Engine
Coolant Temperature
Gage
(OPTION)
A
coolant temperature gage shows the
engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red
warning area, your engine is too hot!
The
CHECK
GAGES
light will go on
and a warning chime will sound, if you
have this option. It means that your
engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, you should
pull off the road, stop your vehicle and
turn off
the
engine as soon as possible.
HOT COOLANT CAN
BURN
YOU
BADLY!
In
Problems
on
the Road,
this
manual shows what to do. See the
Index
under
Engine Overheating.
10s
Oil
Pressure
Gage
(OPTION)
The oil pressure gage shows the engine
oil pressure in psi (pounds per square
inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure
in
kPa.
Oil pressure may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature and oil
viscosity, but readings above the red
warning zone indicate the normal
operating range.
A
reading in
the
red zone may be caused
by
a
dangerously low
oil
level or other
problem causing low oil pressure. The
CHECK
GAGES
light will go on and a
warning chime will sound, if you have
this option.
Driving your vehicle with low oil
pressure can cause extensive engine
damage.
I..
I10
1
Don’t
keep
driving
if the oil
pressure
is
low.
If
you
do,
your engine can become
so
hot
that
it catches
fire.
You or others could
be
burned.
Check
your
oil
as
soon
as
possible and have your vehicle
rviced.
I
I
Damage
to
your
engine from
neglected oil problems can be
costly and is
not
covered by your
warranty.
Voltmeter
(OPTION)
Unless you have the supercharged
engine, you may have a voltmeter.
When the engine is running, the gage
shows the condition
of
the charging
system. Readings outside the red
warning zone indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings
in
the red warning zone
indicate a possible problem in the
electrical system. The
CHECK
GAGES
light will also come
on,
and a warning
,
chime will sound. Have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
When your engine is not running, but
the ignition is on (in the
Run
position),
the gage shows your battery’s state
of
charge in DC volts.
Boost
Gage
(OPTION)
Vehicles equipped with
the
supercharged
engine have this boost gage that
indicates vacuum during light to
moderate throttle and boost under
heavier throttle. The gage displays the
air pressure level
in
psi
going into
the
engine’s combustion chamber.
The gage is automatically centered at
zero psi
every
time the engine
is
started.
Actual vacuum or boost
is
displayed
from this zero point. Changes
in
ambient pressure, such as driving
in
mountains and changing weather, will
slightly change
the
zero reading.
I
rn
Driver Znformation Center
If you have the Driver Information
Center, it gives you important safety and
maintenance facts. When you turn the
ignition on, the entire Center lights up
for a few seconds. Then it goes to work.
FUNCTION MONITOR:
This lets you
know if you are low
on
fluids or have a
problem with a vehicle function:
CHECK OIL LEVEL:
This message
could mean your oil level is low. If
it
comes on for more than three seconds,
see
the
Index
under
Check
Oil
Level
Warning Light.
WASHER FLUID:
This message
means your washer fluid tank is less
than
30%
full. The windshield portion
of the vehicle outline will also glow. If
these come on, see the
Index
under
Windshield Washer Fluid.
means your coolant level has fallen to
about half full. If it comes on,
see
the
Index
under
Engine Coolant.
CHECK GAGES:
If this light comes
on and stays on while
you
are driving,
check your gages for fuel, coolant
temperature, oil pressure or battery
voltage.
LOW
COOLANT
This message
111
Features
&
Controls
Diver
Information Center
(Cont.)
LAMP
MONITOR:
Whenever you try
to use one of the following lights,
LAMP
MONITOR
will tell you
if
a
bulb is out.
Head Lamp (Low and High beam)
Turn Signal
Park
Lamp
Brake Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Tail Lamp
If
a
bulb is out, you will see
a
message,
such
as
PARK
LAMP,
and you will
also
see where the problem is
on
the
vehicle outline. The message
stays
on
until the problem is fixed. See the
Index
under
Replacement
Bulbs
for bulb details.
112
mmm
If
a burned-out bulb
is
replaced, the
warning light will stay on until the bulb
is
used (for example, by turning
on
your
lights).
If
you
pull a trailer, the extra trailer
lamp bulbs will not allow the lamp
monitor to properly detect a burned-out
bulb. When the trailer lights are
disconnected, the lamp monitor will
again monitor the bulbs.
SECURITY
You’ll get a
DOOR
AJAR
message if a door is not fully closed.
The vehicle outline will show
you
which
door it is. You will also get a
HOOD
AJAR
or
TRUNK
AJAR
message if
the hood or the trunk isn’t fully closed.
The vehicle outline will also
show
you
these are ajar.
I
Electronic
Compass
(OPTION)
On some vehicles, an electronic
compass comes on when you start the
engine. As
with
all compasses, it senses
magnetic north to determine direction.
But magnetic north is not located at the
same place as true north,
so
a zone
value is used to improve accuracy.
Setting Up
Your
Compass
Consists
of
Two
Steps:
1.
Calibrating the compass to magnetic
north.
2.
Setting the zone
so
the compass
points to true north.
Calibrating
the
Compass
The compass should be calibrated
according to the proper Zone Setting:
At least once a year.
Any time it displays the word
Any time it seems to show incorrect
CALIBRATE.
directions.
Calibrating to Magnetic
North:
1.
Drive to an open area such as a large,
empty parking lot. Be sure the area is
not only free
of
other vehicles but
also
away from power lines or large
metal objects.
2.
Push and hold
MODE
for more than
six seconds. After
three
seconds,
CALIBRATE
and the heading
display will
go
off.
ZONE
and the
zone number will be displayed.
After six seconds,
CALIBRATE
will
flash and the heading display will
rotate.
ZONE
and the zone number
will go blank.
Release the
MODE
button.
113
.
'
Features
&
Controls
Calibrating the Compass
(CONT.)
3.
Drive slowly in a circle at about
5
mph
(8
km/h).
Try
to keep your
vehicle level.
4.
When
CALIBRATE
stops flashing,
your compass is calibrated to
magnetic north.
If
CALIBRATE
stops flashing before
1%
circles, the calibration may not be
accurate. However, if you are certain the
calibration is accurate after the zone is
set, then recalibration is not needed.
Otherwise, repeat the calibration. If this
condition continues, move the vehicle to
a new area and recalibrate.
If
CALIBRATE
continues to flash after
about seven circles, your compass is not
calibrated.
You
could be too close to a
power line or large metal object, or
something magnetic
in
your vehicle (like
a
CB
antenna) could keep the compass
from calibrating.
If
you
are uncertain about where you are
in the calibration sequence, or want
to
start over, simply push and release the
MODE
or
SET
button, or turn the
ignition off and restart the engine.
Setting the Zone
Setting the zone corrects for differences
between magnetic and true north.
You
can set the zone in two ways: By
selecting the zone you are located in or
by pointing your vehicle north and
telling the compass the direction of
north. Perform only one
of
the two
methods
(A
or
B)
each time you change
zones. The last zone selection is
remembered.
...
114
A.
By Geographic Location:
1.
With the engine running, press and
hold
MODE
for more than three
seconds. After three seconds,
CALIBRATE
and the heading
display will go blank.
ZONE
and the
zone number will be displayed.
Release the
MODE
button.
2.
Check,the chart to see which zone
you are in.
3.
Press or hold
SET
until the display
shows the number
of
your zone.
4.
Press
MODE
again to enter your
zone in the compass.
B.
By Pointing Vehicle
North:
1
.
Point your vehicle to true north.
2.
Press and hold
MODE
until
ZONE
appears on the display.
3.
Press or hold
SET
until
ZONE
00
is
displayed.
4.
Press
MODE.
The display will show
a northern heading and the direction
bars will flash.
5.
Press
MODE
again. The display will
show the current zone setting for two
seconds, then keep that setting unless
you change it.
6.
When your engine
is
running, your
comoass should display true north.
You can change your zone any time you
move to another zone without
calibrating to magnetic north. However,
if you are uncertain of accuracy, repeat
the entire sequence by starting with step 1.
Temporary Disturbances:
Your compass may sometimes display a
different heading for a moment
as
you
pass under bridges, power lines
or
large
metal objects,
or
when you are driving
on steep hills. This is normal.
115
Features
&
Controls
pH2119
Head-Up
Display
(omorq
If
you
have the optional Head-Up
Display (HUD), you can see the
speedometer reading in English or
metric units displayed “through” the
windshield.
The HUD
also
shows:
Turn signal indicator lights.
A
high beam indicator symbol.
A
CHECK
GAGES
message. (For
low oil pressure, high coolant
temperature, low oil level and low
fuel
.)
A low
fuel
warning symbol.
The HUD shows these lights when they
are lit
on
the instrument panel.
...
116
When you sit straight in your seat, the
HUD image will appear slightly to the
right in front
of
the driver.
When the ignition is turned
to
Run,
all
possible HUD images will come on as
shown above. Then the Head-Up
Display will operate normally.
14
NOTEE
Although the HUD image appears
to be near the front
of
the vehicle,
do not use it as a parking aid. The
HUD was not designed
for
that
purpose.
If
you
try
to
use it that
way, such as in a parking lot,
you
may misjudge distance and run into
something.
If
you
never
look
at your
b
instrument panel, you
may
not
see
something important, such as a
warning
light.
So
be
sure
to
scan
your displays and controls and the
driving environment just
as
you
would in a vehicle without
HUD.
To
Adjust the
HUD
so You
Can
See
it
Properly:
The
HUD
controls are located to the left
of the steering column.
1,
Start
your engine and slide the
DIM
(dimmer) control all
the
way up.
The brightness of the
HUD
image is
determined by whether the headlight
switch
is
on or off, and where
you
have
set the
HUD
dimmer control.
2.
Adjust the seat, if necessary, before
setting the height control.
control all the way up, raising the
image as far as possible. Then slide
the
HUD
image
height control
downward
so
the image
is
as
low
as
possible but
in
full
view.
3.
Slide the dimmer control down until
the
HUD
image is no brighter than
necessary.
To
turn the
HUD
off, slide
the dimmer control all
the
way down.
If the sun comes
out,
or it becomes
cloudy, or
if
you turn on your
headlights,
you
may need to adjust
the
HUD’s
brightness using the
HUD
dimmer control. Polarizing sunglasses
could make the
HUD
image harder to
see.
I\
bright, or too high in your
field of view,
it
may take you more
time to see things you need
to
see
when it’s dark outside. Be sure to
keep the
HUD
image dim and
placed low
in
your field
of
view.
Pushing the
ENGIMET
(English/Metric)
button will switch the
HUD
speedometer indicator from English
(conventional) to metric units, or back
again.
117
I..
Care
of
the
Head-Up
Display
Clean the inside
of
the
windshield as
needed to remove any dirt or film that
reduces the sharpness or clarity
of
the
HUD image.
To
Clean the
HUD:
Spray household glass cleaner on a
soft,
clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently,
then
dry
it. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the lens, because the cleaner
fluid could leak inside the unit
if
you
do.
If
You
Can’t See the
HUD
Image
When the Ignition
is
On:
Is
anything covering the HUD unit?
Is
the HUD dimmer control far
Is
the
HUD
image adjusted to the
Still
no
HUD image? Check the fuse
enough
up?
proper height?
in the
fuse
panel. See the
Index
under
Fuses
&
Circuit
Breakers.
Ifthe
HUD
Image
is
Not
Clear:
It could be too bright. Slide the HUD
dimmer control further downward.
You may need to clean the windshield
and HUD lens.
Your windshield is part
of
the HUD
system.
If
you ever have to have a new
windshield, be sure to get one designed
for HUD.
If
you don’t, the HUD image
may
look
blurred and
out
of
focus.
In this part you’ll find out how to
operate the comfort control systems
and audio systems offered with your
Pontiac. Be sure to read about the
particular system supplied with your
vehicle.
Part
3
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
n
.....................................
Standard Climate Control.
.l20
Electronic Climate Control
123
AM/FM Stereo Radio
.128
AM/FM Stereo with Cassette Player and Graphic Equalizer
................
131
.........................................
.................................
Setting the Clock
..............
.E7
AMlFM Stereo with Cassette Player
.................................
.I29
AM/FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
............................
.134
Steering Wheel Controls for Audio System
............................
.139
Understanding Radio Reception
.....................................
.140
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player
...................................
.141
............................................
Gaincontrol
....................................................
140
.......................................
.............................................
........................................
Care
of
Your Compact Discs .141
Fixed Mast Antenna.
.I42
Power Antenna Mast Care .I42
119
=
=
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
~ ~~
I
Standard
Climate Control
The air conditioner and heater work
best
if
you keep your windows closed
while using them.
e
:
Selects the force
of
air you want.
The fan is always running unless the
mode control
is
moved
to
OFF.
Temperature
Control:
The center
control regulates the temperature
of
the
air
coming through the system.
Mode
Control:
The right control has
settings for air conditioning and non-air
conditioning modes.
120
Air Conditioning Settings
There are three air conditioning settings.
On
very hot days, open the windows
long enough to let hot inside air escape.
This reduces the time your air
conditioner's compressor
will
have to
run,
which should help fuel economy.
MAX:
Provides maximum cooling or
quick cool-down on very hot days. This
setting recirculates much
of
the air
inside your vehicle, and it should not be
used for long periods because
the
air
may become too cold and dry.
A/C:
Use for normal cooling on hot
days. This setting cools outside air and
directs it through the instrument panel
outlets.
I
9
(Bi-Level):
Use on cool, but
sunny days. This setting brings
in
the
outside air, but directs
it
in
two ways.
The cool air
is
directed to the upper
portion
of
your body through the
instrument panel outlets, but warmed air
1
is
directed through the heater ducts and
~
defroster vents. At times this
temperature difference may be more
apparent than others.
The air conditioner compressor operates
in
all
air conditioner positions, and
in
(@
(Defrost) and
,>
(Defog)
when
the outside temperature is above
50°F
(IOOC).
When the
air
conditioner
is
on,
you may sometimes notice slight
changes
in
your vehicle's engine speed
and power. This is normal, because the
system
is
designed to cycle the
compressor on and off to keep the
desired cooling and help fuel economy.
I
c
Non-Air Conditioning Settings
2
(Vent):
This setting brings
in
the
outside air and directs it to the upper
portion of your body through the
instrument panel outlets.
A!
(Heat):
This setting directs
warmed air through the heater ducts.
The air conditioner compressor doesn’t
run
in the non-air conditioning settings.
This reduces engine load, resulting in
improved fuel economy. If no non-air
conditioning setting maintains the
comfort of the air inside your vehicle, or
it causes your windows to fog
up,
move
the right selector to
MAX
or
A/C,
or
to
(@
(Defrost).
Defrosting
The setting (Defrost) directs most
air through the defroster vents, and
some through the heater ducts. Use this
for when you have fog or ice on the
windshield. When it’s
50°F
(10°C)
or
warmer outside, you’ll get cooled air.
Defogging Windows
with
Standard Climate Control
Move the temperature control to
--
maximum heat.
To
quickly defog the windshield, set the
right selector to
(@
and turn the fan
control to
HIGH.
Use
~2
(Defog) for normal defogging
of
the windshield.
U
121
smm
*
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
Defogging Windows with
Standard Climate Control
(CONT:)
To
defog the side windows, move the
mode
control to
,g
and the fan control
to
HIGH.
Aim the side vents toward the
side windows. For increased air flow to
the
side
vents, close the center vents.
.ma
122
rl
t
Rear Window Defogger
(OPTION)
The rear window defogger uses
a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window. Press the
@
button and
release
it.
A light will glow in the
switch while the defogger
is
working.
The defogger will return to off
automatically after about
10
minutes of
use. If you turn
it
on again, the defogger
will operate for about five minutes only.
You can
also
turn the defogger off by
turning off the ignition or pressing the
button again.
Do
not attach
a
temporary vehicle
license across the defogger grid on the
rear window.
A
~
Don't use a
razor
blade or
something else sharp
on
the inside
of
the rear window.
If
you
do,
you
could cut or damage the warming
grid, and the repairs wouldn't be
covered by your warranty.
.,
.
..
-.
Electronic Climate Control
(OPTION)
With this system, you can control the
ventilation, heating and air conditioning
in your vehicle, or you can use the auto-
matic setting.
The digital screen displays the outside
temperature, the inside temperature
setting, the fan speed, and the heating
mode you have selected.
The air conditioner compressor operates
in all
AUTO
setting positions, and
in
(@
when the outside temperature is
above 49°F (9°C). When the air
conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes
in
your vehicle's
engine speed and power. This is normal,
because the system
is
designed to cycle
the
compressor on and off to keep the
desired cooling and help
fuel
economy.
TEMP:
Sets the interior temperature
you want. The temperature you set will
be displayed on the digital screen.
Once you set the temperature, the system
will
try
to maintain the set tempera-
ture, whether or not you are using the
heating or cooling controls. But
if
you
set the temperature for 60°F (16°C) or
90"
F
(32"
C),
the fan will stay on
HI
speed unless you select a different
speed.
AUTO:
To
allow the system to
automatically control the temperature,
air distribution and fan speed:
1.
Set the temperature you want with the
2.
Press the
AUTO
switch.
TEMP
switch.
EXT.
TEMP:
Press to have the outside
temperature displayed on the digital
screen (unless the system is
off).
Press
again to return to the inside temperature
setting. When the system is
off,
the
outside temperature will be displayed.
Use the following controls when
AUTO
is not desired.
%
:
Sets the fan speed. Press the top
of the switch to raise the fan speed, the
bottom of the switch to lower the fan
speed.
123
'
'
Comfort Controls
&
Audio
Systems
Electronic Climate Control
(Cont.)
OF/”
C:
Press this to read the temperature
in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius.
OFF:
Shuts the system off. The outside
temperature will be displayed. Air will
still
flow
through your vehicle if it is
moving. Also, the system will try to
maintain the temperature you set, but
may not be able to if it’s very warm or
cold outside.
ECON:
Use in cold or cool weather.
This saves
fuel
because the air
conditioner compressor doesn’t
run.
But
this setting doesn’t remove humidity
from
the air.
(Defrost):
Press this to remove
fog or ice from the windshield. It will
start
at the high fan speed, but you can
select another speed
if
you
want. It’s a
good idea to remove any ice or snow
from the hood and from
the
air inlet
between the hood and windshield.
@
(Rear
Window
Defogger):
Press
to warm the defogger grid
on
the rear
window.
On
some models, the outside
rearview mirrors are also warmed. The
rear window defogger will turn off
automatically after about
10
minutes of
use.
If
you turn it
on
again, the defogger
will operate for about five minutes
only.
You can also turn the defogger off by
turning off the ignition or pressing the
switch again.
Do
not attach a temporary vehicle
license across the defogger grid
on
the
rear window.
Don’t
use
a razor blade or something
else sharp on the inside
of
the rear
window.
If
you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
1.1
124
Extended
Idling
with
Electronic
Rear
Venfs
Ciimate
Control
Slide
the
center control up to direct air
When the engine idles for
a
long time, Upward. Slide
it
down to direct air
the outside temperature sensor
may
cool. This should stop once the vehicle
cause
the system
to
blow air that is too direct air both
UP
and dOwn.
downward. The center position will
recommended. See
the
Index
under
is
moving again. Extended idling
is
not
Engine
Exhaust.
Flow-Through
Ventilation
System
Your
Pontiac's flow-through ventilation
system supplies outside air into the
vehicle when it is moving. Outside air
will also enter the vehicle when the
heater or the air conditioning
fan
is
running.
125
..I
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Flow-Through
Ventilation System
(CONT)
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free
of
ice, snow, or any other obstruction
(such as leaves). The heater and
defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging
the
inside of
your windows.
Standard Climate Control in cold
weather, select a heater function that
blows air through
the
floor ducts.
Then turn the blower fan to
HI
for a
few moments before driving off. This
will blow moist air from the intake
When you enter a vehicle with
126
ducts toward the floor,
not
the
windshield. It reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows. If
you have the Electronic Climate
Control,
the
AUTO
setting
does
this
for you.
Keep the air path under the front seats
clear of objects. This helps air to
circulate throughout your vehicle.
rn
Audio
Systems
The following pages describe the audio
systems available for your Pontiac, and
how to get the best performance from
them. Please read about the system
in
your vehicle.
Hearing damage from loud
noise is almost undetectable
until it
is
too late. Your hearing
can
adapt to higher volumes
of
sound.
Sound that seems normal can be
loud and harmful to your hearing.
Take precautions by adjusting the
volume control on your radio to a
safe sound level before your
hearing adapts to it.
To
help avoid hearing loss or
damage:
1.
Adjust the volume control to
the
lowest setting.
2.
Increase volume slowly
until
you he: :omfortably and
clearly.
I
Before you add any sound
equipment to your vehicle-like a
tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio-be
sure you can add what
you
want.
If
you can, it’s
very
important to do it
properly. Added sound equipment
may interfere with the operation
of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco@ radio
or other systems, and can even
damage them. And, your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that
has been added improperly.
So,
before adding
sound
equipment, check with your dealer
and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and
telephone units.
Setting
the
Clock
For
Radios
with 4SEEKb
:
1.
With the radio off, press
SET.
The
SET
indicator
will
appear
on
the
digital screen for five seconds.
2.
Within that five seconds, press ani
hold
SEEK,
until
the correct
minute appears
on
the display.
3.
Before another five seconds pass,
press and hold
4SEEK
until the
correct hour appears.
For
Radios with VSEEU:
1.
With
the
radio
on
or off, press
SET.
The
SET
indicator will appear on the
digital display for five seconds.
2.
Within that five seconds, press and
hold
SEE-
until
the
correct
minute appears
on
the display.
3.
Before another five seconds pass,
press and hold
WEEK
until the
correct hour appears.
127
...
m..
Comfort Controls
&
Audio
Systems
A#.FM
Stereo
Radio
The digital display indicates information
on time or radio station frequency, the
AM
or
FM
radio band, whether the station
is
in
stereo, and other radio functions.
Upper Knob (PWRoVOL):
This knob
does
three things:
Rotate it to turn
the
system
on
and off
Rotate it to control the volume.
Press
it
to recall the station frequency
(PWR).
when the radio is on.
128
BAL (Balance):
The control ring
behind the upper knob adjusts the
lefthight speaker balance.
Lower Knob
(TUNE):
This
knob
does
two things:
Rotate
it
to tune in radio stations.
Press it to change between the
AM
or
FADE:
The control ring behind the
lower knob adjusts the fronthear
speaker balance.
7
SEEK
A:
Press to seek and stop on
the next station higher or lower
on
the
radio band.
FM
band.
TREB (Treble):
Slide this lever up to
increase treble, or down to decrease it.
If a station is weak or noisy, reduce the
treble.
BASS:
Slide this lever
up
to increase
bass, or down to decrease
it.
To
Preset
Radio
Stations:
1
.
Tune
in
the desired station.
2.
Press
SET.
The word
SET
will appear
on the digital screen for five seconds.
3.
While
SET
is displayed, press one
of
the four pushbuttons.
The station is now preset. You can
tune to
it
immediately by pressing the
same numbered pushbutton.
4.
Repeat steps
1-3
for each
of
four
AM
and four
FM
stations.
Up to three additional stations on each
band may be preset by “pairing”
pushbuttons:
1
.
Tune
in
the desired station.
2.
Press
SET,
and within five seconds
press any two adjacent pushbuttons at
the same time.
3.
The station can be tuned
in
when
the
same two pushbuttons are pressed at
the same time.
AM/FM
Stereo with Cassette
Player
The digital display indicates information
on time or radio station frequency, the
AM
or
FM
radio band, whether the station
is
in stereo, and other radio functions.
Upper Knob
(PWRoVOL):
This knob
does four things:
Rotate
it
to turn the system on and off
Rotate
it
to control the volume.
Press it to recall the station frequency
(PWR)
*
when the radio is
on.
When
a
tape is playing, press it to
hear the other side
of
the tape.
BAL (Balance):
The control ring
behind the upper knob adjusts the
lefthight speaker balance.
Lower
Knob
(TUNE):
This knob does
two things:
Rotate it
to
tune in radio stations.
Press
it
to change between the
AM
or
FADE:
The control ring behind the
lower knob adjusts the fronthear
speaker balance.
FM
band.
V
SEEK
A:
Press to seek and stop on
the next station higher or lower
on
the
radio band.
TREB
(Treble):
Slide this lever up to
increase treble, or down
to
decrease it.
If a station is weak or noisy, reduce the
treble.
BASS:
Slide this lever up to increase
bass, or down to decrease it.
To Preset Radio Stations:
1.
Tune in the desired station.
2.
Press
SET.
The word
SET
will
appear
on
the digital screen for five
seconds.
3.
While
SET
is displayed, press
one
of
the four pushbuttons.
The station is
now
preset. You can
tune
to
it immediately by pressing the
same numbered pushbutton.
4.
Repeat steps
1-3
for each of four
AM
and four
FM
stations.
129
...
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
AMIFM
Stereo with Cassette
Player
(CONX:)
Up to three additional stations on each
band may be preset by “pairing”
pushbuttons:
1.
Tune in the desired station.
2.
Press
SET,
and within five seconds
press any two adjacent pushbuttons at
the
same time.
3.
The station can be tuned in when the
same
two pushbuttons are pressed at
the same time.
To Play
a
Cassette
Tape:
With the power switch on, insert a tape
into the cassette door. Do not use tapes
that are longer than
45
minutes on each
side.
When the right indicator arrow is lit,
selections listed on the bottom side
of
the cassette are playing. When the left
arrow is lit, selections listed on the top
side
of
the cassette are playing.
To
change sides of the tape, press the upper
control knob while the cassette is
playing. When the end
of
a tape is
reached, the other side will then play.
FAST
FORWARD:
Depress the button
with the arrow pointing
in
the same
direction that the tape is playing.
To
stop
fast forward, press the
STOP-EJECT
button.
REWRSE:
Depress the button with the
arrow pointing in the opposite direction
that the tape is playing.
To
stop reverse,
press the
STOP-EJECT
button.
STOP-EJECT
To
stop playing a tape,
fully press this button (the cassette will
be partially ejected, and the radio will
begin playing).
AM/FM
Stereo with Cassette
Player and Graphic Equalizer
The digital display indicates information
on time
or
radio station frequency, the
AM or FM radio band, whether the station
is in stereo, and other radio functions.
PWR
(Power):
Turns the unit on and
off when the ignition
is
on.
Upper Knob
(VOL):
This knob does
two things:
Rotate it slightly to the left or right to
control the volume.
Press it to mute the radio or tape
BAL
(Balance):
The control ring
behind the upper knob adjusts the
lefthight speaker balance. The digital
display shows the balance selected.
player. Press again to listen.
Lower Knob
(TUNE):
This
knob
does
two things:
Rotate it slightly to the left or right
to
tune in radio stations.
If
you hold it to
the
left
or right, it will tune rapidly.
You can also rotate
it
one stop at
a
time to fine-tune a specific frequency.
Press to change between the AM,
FM1 or FM2 bands. (FM1 allows
you
to preset five stations, FM2 allows you
to preset another five stations.)
Your radio has an AMAX-certified
receiver. It can produce quality AM
stereo sound and receive C-Quam@
stereo broadcasts. AMAX reduces noise
without reducing the high frequencies
you need for the best sound. You don’t
have
to
do anything to your Delco/GM
radio because AMAX is automatic.
1,
131
Comfort Controls
&
Audio
Systems
AM/FM
Stereo with Cassette
Player and Graphic Equalizer
(CONI)
FADE:
The control ring behind the
lower knob adjusts the fronthear
speaker balance. The digital display
shows
the degree of fade selected,
4SEEKb:
Press
to
seek and stop on
the next station higher or lower on the
radio band.
RCL:
Press
to
alternate the display
between the time and station frequency.
EQUALIZER:
Boost the bass,
emphasize a voice in a song, brighten
the treble-your equalizer gives you
freedom to adjust five separate
frequencies of sound
to
your individual
taste. Move a lever up to emphasize a
frequency, move
it
down to de-emphasize.
It’s best to begin with the levers in the
middle position, then adjust each lever
as
you like.
To
Preset
Radio
Stations:
The five pushbuttons under the digital
~
display can be used to preset
UP
to 15
I
radio stations (five
AM,
five FMl and
five FM2). The buttons have other uses
when you are playing a tape (see
Tape
Player).
1.
Tune the digital display to the station
you want.
2.
Press
SET.
The
SET
indicator will
appear
on
the
digital screen for five
seconds.
3.
While the
SET
indicator is displayed,
press one
of
the five pushbuttons.
4.
Repeat steps 1-3 for each of five
AM,
five FM1 and five FM2 stations.
m..
132
To Play a Cassette Tape:
Press
PWR
to turn the radio on. The
radio will play until a cassette is pushed
into the cassette entry door (the tape
side goes in first).
Do
not use tapes that
are longer than
90
minutes
(45
minutes
on each side).
This audio system has automatic
00
Dolby@B Noise Reduction to
reduce background noise on Dolby@
encoded tapes. Dolby@B Noise
Reduction is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. Dolby@ and the
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
00
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
PROG (Program):
Press to change the
side of tape being played. When the end
Df
a tape is reached, the other side will
then play.
CrOa:
This button sets tape bias. When
playing high bias chrome or metal tapes,
press the button to turn the Cr02 display
on. When playing standard tapes, press
again to turn the display
off.
REV
(Reverse):
Press to reverse the
tape rapidly; press again to play the
tape. (The radio plays while a tape is
rewinding.)
FWD (Fast Forward):
Press to advance
the tape rapidly; press again to play.
(The radio plays while the tape
is
advancing.)
PREV
(Previous):
Press
PREV
to
repeat a passage. The tape will back up
and stop at the first four-second quiet
spot in the tape, or when you press
PREV
or
PROG
again.
NEXT
Press to
go
to the next selection
on the tape. The tape will stop at the
first four-second quiet
spot
in the tape,
or if
you
press
NEXT
or
PROG
again.
ST-PL (Stop-Play):
Press to switch
from the tape to the radio. Press again to
resume playing the tape.
EJECT
Press to eject the cassette tape
(the radio will then play).
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
AM/FM
Stereo
with
Compact
Disc
Player
The digital display indicates information
on
time or radio station frequency, the
AM
or
FM radio band, whether the station
is
in stereo, and other radio functions.
PWR
(Power):
Turns
the
unit
on
and
off when the ignition is on.
Upper
Knob
(VOL):
This knob does
two
things:
Rotate it slightly to the left or right to
Press
it
to mute the radio or tape
control
the
volume.
player. Press again to listen.
134
BAL (Balance):
The control ring
behind the upper knob adjusts the
lefthight speaker balance. The digital
display shows the balance selected.
Lower
Knob
(TUNE):
This knob does
two
things:
Rotate
it
slightly to the
left
or right to
tune in radio stations.
If
you hold it to
the
left
or right, it will tune rapidly.
You
can also
rotate
it one stop
at
a
time
to
fine-tune a specific frequency.
Press to change between the
AM,
FMl
or
FM2 bands. (FM1 allows you
to preset five stations, FM2 allows you
to
preset another five stations.)
Your radio has
an
AMAX-certified
receiver.
It
can produce quality
AM
stereo sound and receive C-Quam@
stereo broadcasts. AMAX reduces noise
without reducing the high frequencies
you need for the best sound.
You
don’t
have to do anything to your Delco/GM
radio because
AMAX
is automatic.
FADE:
The control ring behind the
lower
knob
adjusts the fronthear
speaker balance. The digital display
shows the degree of fade selected.
4SEEKF
:
Press to seek and stop on
the next station higher or lower
on
the
radio band.
RCL:
Press to alternate the display
between the time and station frequency.
EQUALIZER:
Boost the bass, em-
phasize a voice in a song, brighten the
treble-your equalizer gives you
freedom to adjust five separate
frequencies
of
sound to your individual
taste.
Move a lever up to emphasize a
frequency, move
it
down to de-emphasize.
It’s best to begin with the levers in the
middle position, then adjust each lever
as you like.
The five pushbuttons at the lower right
can be used to preset up to
15
radio
stations (five
AM,
five
FM1
and five
FM2).
The buttons have other uses
when you are playing a compact disc
(see
Compact Disc Controls).
To
Preset Radio Stations:
1.
Tune the digital display to the station
you want.
2.
Press
SET.
The
SET
indicator will
appear on the digital screen for five
seconds.
3.
While the
SET
indicator is displayed,
press one
of
the five pushbuttons.
4.
Repeat steps
1-3
for each
of
five
AM,
five
FM1
and five
FM2
stations.
Compact Disc Controls
Many
of
the controls for the radio also
have functions for the compact disc
player, as explained here.
To Play
a
Compact
Disc:
Don’t use mini-discs that are called
singles. They won’t eject. Use only full-
size compact discs.
1 .
Press
PWR
to turn the radio on.
2.
Insert a disc part-way into the slot,
with the label side up. The player
will pull it in. In a few seconds, the
disc should play.
If
the disc comes back out and/or
Err
appears on the display:
The disc may be upside down.
The disc may be dirty, scratched or
wet.
There may be too much moisture in
the air (wait about one hour and try
again).
The player may be too hot, or the road
may be too rough for the disc
to
play.
As
soon as things get back to normal,
the disc should play.
135
c
I..
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
Compact
Disc
Controk
(CONI)
While a disc is playing, the
CD
indi-
cator is displayed on the digital screen,
as
is
the clock.
RCL
(Recall):
Press once to see which
track
is
playing. Press again while the
track number
is
displayed to see how
long your selection has been playing.
The track number also will be displayed
when the volume is changed
or
a new
track starts to play.
COMP
(Compression):
Depressing this
button makes
soft
and loud passages
more equal in volume. Press again to
resume
normal
play.
RDM
(Random):
Press to play
random order.
-
tracks in
REV
(Reverse):
Press and hold to
rapidly back up to a favorite passage.
Release
to
resume playing.
FWD
(Fast
Forward):
Press and hold
to rapidly advance the disc. Release to
resume playing.
PREV (Previous):
Press to play a track
again.
If
you keep pressing the
PREV
button, the disc will keep backing up to
previous tracks.
NEXT
Press when you want to hear
the
next track. If you keep pressing the
NEXT
button, the disc will keep
advancing to other tracks.
When Finished
with
the Compact
Disc
Player:
If
you press
PWR
or
turn
off the
ignition, the disc will stay in the player
and
start
again when you turn on the
ignition or power switch. The disc will
begin playing at
the
point where it had
been stopped.
ST/PL
(Stop/Play):
Press to stop the
disc player; the radio will play. Press
again to play the disc (the player will
start playing the disc where
it
was
stopped earlier).
EJECT
Press to eject the disc; the
radio will play. After eject, if you turn
the ignition
off
with the disc part-way
out, the player will pull the disc back in
after about
30
seconds. When the player
is turned on, it will begin play on the
first track.
4
CD
Player
Anti-Theft
Feature
Delco
LOC
11
is a security feature for
the compact disc player. It can be used
or ignored. If ignored, the system plays
normally. If it is used, your player won’t
be usable
if
it is ever stolen, because it
will go to
LOC
mode any time battery
power is removed. Until an unlock code
is entered, it will not
turn
on.
The instructions below tell you how to
enter a secret code into the system.
If
your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason, you must unlock the system with
the secret code before the radio will
turn
on.
1.
Write down any six-digit number and
2.
Turn the ignition to the
Accessory
or
keep it in a safe place.
Run
position.
3.
Press the
PWR
button
to
turn the
4.
Press the
1
and
4
buttons together.
radio off.
Hold them down until
“-
-
-”
shows
on the display. You are ready
to
enter
your secret code.
NOTE:
If
you allow more than
15
seconds to elapse between any steps, the
radio automatically reverts
to
time and
you must start the procedure over at step
4.
5.
Press
SET
and
000
will appear
on
the
display.
6.
Press the
SEEK,
button
to
make the
first number of your code appear.
7.
Rotate the
TUNE
knob
right or left
to
make
the second
and
third
numbers agree with your code.
8.
Press the lower
(BAND)
knob and
000
will appear again. Now you are
ready
to
enter the last three digits of
your code.
three digits
of
your code.
REP
will appear for five seconds
and then
000
will appear.
11.
Repeat steps
6
through
10.
This time
SEC
will appear, indicating that the
radio is secure.
9.
Repeat steps
6
and
7
for the last
IO.
Press the lower
(BAND)
knob and
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
CD
Player Anti-Theft kature
(WNX)
To
Unlock
the System After
a
Power
Loss:
When battery power is reapplied to
a
secured radio, the radio won't
turn
on
and
LOC
will appear on the display.
Enter your secret code as follows; pause
no more than
l5
seconds between steps.
1.
Turn the ignition on. (Radio off.)
2.
Press the
SET
button. The display
will show
000.
3.
Enter the six digits of the code
following steps
6-9
above. The
display will show the numbers as
entered.
4.
Press the lower
(BAND)
knob and
SEC
appears, then the time,
indicating that the disabling sequence
was successful.
Disabling
the Anti-Theft System:
1.
Press the
1
and
4
buttons together for
five seconds with ignition on and
radio power
off.
The display will
show
SECURED,
indicating the unit
is in the secure mode.
2.
Press the
SET
button. The display
will show
000.
3.
Enter the first three digits
of
the code
following steps
6-7
earlier in this
section. The display will show the
numbers as entered.
4.
Press the lower
(BAND)
knob. The
radio will display
000.
5.
Enter the second three digits
of
the
code. The display will show the
numbers
as
entered.
6.
Press the lower
(BAND)
knob.
If
the
display shows
"-
-
-,"
the disabling
sequence was successful (the
numbers matched the user-selected
code or the factory back-up code)
and the unit is in the
UNSECURED
mode.
If
the display shows
SEC,
the
disabling sequence
was
unsuccessful
and the numbers did not match either
of
the codes and the unit will remain
in the
SECURED
mode.
I..
138
c
t
L
Steering Wheel
Controls
for
Audio
System
Some audio functions can be operated
with these controls:
AM/FM:
Press to select either the
AM
or
FMl
and
FM2
radio bands. The band
you select will
be
displayed
on
the
digital screen. The frequency of the
station will be displayed, and
if
the
station is in stereo, the stereo indicator
will also
be
displayed.
SEEK:
Each time you press
an
up
or
down arrow on
SEEK,
you will tune in
the next station up or down the
AM
or
FM
radio band.
When listening
to
a cassette tape or
compact disc, you can change to the
previous
or
next
selection
by
pressing
the
SEEK
up or down arrow.
RCL
(Recall):
When the radio is on,
press
to
change between the clock and
the radio station frequency displayed on
the digital screen.
I
PRE-SET
Press this to hear the radio
stations that are set on your system.
VOL
(Volume):
Press
A
to increase
volume. Press
7
to
lower the volume.
PWR:
Turns the
unit
on and off when
the ignition is on.
139
t
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
Gain Control
Some models have this control below
the audio system.
To get more bass sound, move the
GAIN
control to adjust the amount of
bass.
Understanding Radio Reception
FM
Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound,
but FM signals will reach only about
10
to
40
miles
(16
to
65
km).
Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with
FM
signals, causing the sound to come and
go.
AM
The range for most AM stations
is
greater than for
FM,
especially at night.
The longer range, however, can cause
stations to interfere with each other.
AM
can also pick up noise from things like
storms and power lines. To lower this
noise, try reducing the treble level.
AM
Stereo
Your Delco@ system may be able to
receive C-Quam@ stereo broadcasts.
Many
AM
stations around the country
use C-Quam@ to produce stereo, though
some
do
not. C-Quam@ is
a
registered
trademark of Motorola, Inc. If your
Delco@ system can get C-Quam@
signals, your stereo indicator light will
come on when you are receiving it.
'
140
I
Care
of
Your
Cassette
Tape Player
A
tape player that is not cleaned
regularly can cause reduced sound
quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be
stored in their cases away from
contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may
not operate properly or cause failure of
the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned
regularly each month or after every
15
hours of use. If you notice a reduction in
sound quality,
try
a known good cassette
to see
if
the tape or the tape player
is
at
fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean
the
tape player.
Clean your tape player with a wiping-
action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette,
and follow the directions provided
with it.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the
sound quality may degrade over time.
Always make sure that the cassette tape
is
in good condition before you have
your tape player serviced.
Care
of
Your
Compact
Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in
their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and
dust.
If
the surface of a disc is soiled,
dampen a clean,
soft
cloth in a mild,
neutral detergent solution and clean it,
wiping from the center
to
the
edge.
Be
sure never to touch the signal surface
when handling discs. Pick up discs by
grasping the outer edges or the
edge
of
the hole and the outer edge.
141
U
I..
..I
Comfort
Controls
&
Audio
Systems
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand
most car washes without being
damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten
it
out by hand.
If
the mast is badly bent,
as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure
the
mast is still tightened
to
the fender.
142
Power Antenna Mast Care
Your power antenna will look its best
and work well if it’s cleaned from time
to time.
To Clean
the
Antenna
Mast:
1.
Turn
on
the ignition and radio to
raise the antenna to
full
mast
extension.
2.
Dampen a clean cloth with mineral
spirits or equivalent solvent.
3.
Wipe the cloth over the mast sections,
removing any dirt.
4.
Wipe dry with a clean cloth before
retracting.
5.
Make the antenna
go
up and down
by
turning the radio or ignition on and off.
6.
Then repeat if necessary.
Don’t lubricate the power antenna.
Lubrication could damage it.
1
Before entering an automatic car
wash, turn off your radio to make
the power antenna go down. This
will prevent the mast from possibly
getting damaged. If the antenna
does not go down when you turn
the radio off, it may be damaged or
need to be cleaned. In either case,
lower
the
antenna by hand by
carefully pressing
the
antenna
down.
If
the mast portion of your antenna
is
damaged, you can easily replace it. See
your dealer for a replacement lut, and
follow the instructions in the
kit.
143
' '
Notes
Here you'll find information about
driving on different kinds of roads
and in varying weather conditions
.
We've also included many other
useful tips on driving
.
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
......................................................
................................................
.................................................
Road Signs 146
Defensive Driving
150
Drunken Driving
151
Control
of
a Vehicle
Braking 154
Anti-Lock Brakes
155
Steering Tips
160
Passing
.......................................................
163
DrivingatNight
..................................................
165
Driving in the Rain
168
CityDriving
.....................................................
171
Freeway Driving 172
HillandMountainRoads
...........................................
176
ParkingonHills
..................................................
177
Winter Driving 179
TowingaTrailer
..................................................
183
.....................................................
...............................................
...................................................
Steering in Emergencies
..........................................
161
...............................................
Driving in
Fog,
Mist and
Haze
......................................
170
Driving a Long Distance
...........................................
174
..................................................
...................................................
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Road
Signs
The road signs you see everywhere are
coded by color, shape and symbols. It's
a good idea to know these codes
so
that
you can quickly grasp the basic meaning
or intent of the sign even before
you
have a chance to read it.
STOP1
1
STOP
DO
NOT WRONG
ENTER WAY
Color
of
Road
Signs
Red
means
Stop.
It may also indicate
that some movement is not allowed.
Examples are
Do
Not Enter
and
Wrong
Way.
heen
is used to guide the driver. Green
igns may indicate upcoming freeway
:xits or show the direction
you
should
urn to reach a particular place.
RR
ADVANCE NARROW NO PASSING
CROSSING BRIDGE ZONE
Yellow
indicates a general warning.
Slow down and be careful when
you
see
a yellow sign. It may signal a railroad
crossing ahead, a no-passing
zone,
or
some other potentially dangerous
situation. Likewise, a yellow solid line
painted on the road means
Don't
Cross.
HOSPITAL INFORMATION
Blue
signs with white letters show
motorists' services.
...
146
STOPII
LOW
WORKERS
FLAGGER
SHOULDER AHEAD AHEAD
Orange indicates road construction or
Shape
Of
Road
S@S
rnaincnance. You’ll want to slow down
when
you see an orange sign, as part
of
the road may be closed off or torn up.
And there may be workers and
maintenance vehicles around,
too.
CANOEING SWIMMING
Brown signs point out recreation areas
or points of historic or cultural interest.
The shape
of
the sign will tell you
something, too.
An octagonal (eight-sided) sign means
Stop.
It
is
always red with white letters.
A
triangle,
pointed downward, indicates
Yield.
It assigns the right of way to
traffic
on
certain approaches to an
intersection.
A diamond-shaped sign is a warning
of
something ahead-for example, a curve,
steep hill,
soft
shoulder, or a narrow
bridge.
A
triangular
sign also
is
used on two-
lane roads to indicate a
No
Passing
Zone. This sign will be on the left side
of the roadway.
147
Your
Uriving
and
the
Road
KEEP
LEFT
OR RIGHT TURN
RIGHT THROUGH ONLY
Shape
of
Road Signs
(CONI:)
Rectangular
(square or oblong) signs
show speed limits, parking regulations,
give directions, and such information as
distances to cities.
I
Symbols
on Road Signs
There are many international road signs
in use today.
NO
U NO
TURN PARKING
BICYCLES
NO
The basic message of many of these
signs is in pictures or graphic symbols.
A
picture within a circle with a diagonal
line across it shows what
not
to do.
Traffic Lights
We’re all familiar with traffic lights or
stop lights. Often green arrows are being
used in the lights for improved traffic
control. On some multilane roads, green
arrows light up, indicating that traffic
in
one or more lanes can move or make a
turn. Green arrows don’t mean “go no
matter what.” You’ll still need to
proceed with caution, yielding
the
right
of way to pedestrians and sometimes to
other vehicles.
Some traffic lights also use red arrows
to signify that you must stop before
turning on red.
m..
148
REVERSIBLE
LANE
ON
MULTllANE
ROADWAY
Many city roads and expressways, and
even bridges,
use
reversible-lane traffic
control during rush hours.
A
red
X
light
above a lane means
no
driving in that
lane at that time.
A
green arrow means
you
may drive in that lane.
Look
for the
signs posted to warn drivers what hours
and days these systems are in effect.
bur
Own
Signals
Drivers signal
to
others, too. It’s not
only more polite, it’s safer to let other
drivers know what
you
are doing. And
NO
PASSING
ZONE
Pavement
Markings
Pavement markings add to traffic signs
and signals. They give information
to
drivers without taking attention from the
roadway. A solid yellow line on your
side
of
the road or lane means
Don’t
Cross.
in some places the iaw requires driver
signals.
“urn and Lane Change Signals:
Always signal when
you
plan to turn or
change lanes.
If necessary, you can use hand signals
out the window: Left arm straight out
for a
left
turn, down for slow or about-
to-stop, and up for a right
turn.
Slowing
Down:
If time allows,
tap
the
brake pedal once
or
twice in advance of
slowing or stopping. This warns the
driver behind you.
Disabled:
Your four-way flashers signal
that your vehicle is disabled or is a
hazard. See the
Index
under
Hazard
Warning
Flashers.
Tm#k
Officer
The traffic police officer is
also
a source
of important information. The officer’s
signals govern, no matter what the
traffic lights or other signs say.
The next section discusses some of the
road conditions
you
may
encounter.
149
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about
driving is: Drive defensively.
Please
start
with a very important safety
device in your Pontiac: Buckle up. (See
the
Index
under
Safev
Belts.)
Defensive driving really means “be
ready for anything.” On city streets,
rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers
are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Expect children to dash out from behind
parked cars, often followed by other
children. Expect occupants in parked
cars to open doors into traffic. Watch for
movement in parked cars-someone
may be about to open a door.
Expect other drivers to
run
stop signs
when you are on a through street. Be
ready to brake if necessary as you go
through intersections. You may not have
to use the brake, but if you do, you will
be ready.
If you’re driving through a shopping
center parking lot where there are well-
marked lanes, directional arrows, and
designated parking areas, expect some
drivers to ignore all these markings and
dash straight toward one part of the lot.
Pedestrians can be careless. Watch for
them. In general, you must give way to
pedestrians even if you know you have
the right of way.
Rear-end collisions are about the most
preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural
driving. You never
know
when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Here’s a final bit of information about
defensive driving. The most dangerous
time for driving in the
U.S.
is very early
on Sunday morning.
In
fact,
GM
Research studies show that the most and
the least dangerous times for driving,
every week, fall on the same day. That
day is Sunday. The most dangerous time
is Sunday from 3 a.m. to 4 a.m. The
safest time is Sunday from
10
a.m. to
11 a.m. Driving the same distance on a
Sunday at
3
a.m. isn’t just
a
little more
dangerous than it is at
10
a.m. It’s about
134 times more dangerous!
That leads to the next section.
Drunken
Driving
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a national
tragedy. It’s the number one contributor
to the highwizy death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol takes away three things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Police records show that half of all
motor vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol-a driver,
a
passenger or
someone else, such
as
a pedestrian, had
been drinking. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who
was
drinking and driving. Over
25,000
motor vehicle-related deaths occur each
year because
o€
alcohol, and thousands
of people are injured.
Just how much alcohol is too much
if
a
person plans to drive? Ideally, no one
should drink alcohol and then drive. But
if
one does, then what’s
‘900
much”? It
can
be
a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends an each person and
situation, here is some general
information
on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Content
(BAC)
of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
How
much alcohol is in the drink.
The drinker’s body weight.
The amount
of
food
that is consumed
before and during drinking.
The length of time it has taken the
drinker to consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical
Association,
a
18.O-pound
(82
kg) person
who
drinks
three 12-ounce
(355
ml)
bottles
of
beer
in
an hour will end
up
with
a
BAC
of
about
0.06
percent. The
person would reach the same
BAC
by
drinking thee 4-ounce
(120
ml)
glasses
of
wine
or
three mixed drinks if each
had
1%
ounces (45
rnl)
of
a liquor like
whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount
of
alcohol that counts.
For example, if the
same
person drank
three double martinis
(3
ounces
or
90
ml
of liquor each) within
an
hour,
the person’s
BAC
would
be
close to
0.12
percent.
A
person
who
consumes
food
just before or during drinking will
have
a
slightly lower
BAC
level.
151
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
II
Drunken Driving
(CONK)
The law in most
U.S.
states sets the
legal limit at a BAC
of
0.10
percent. In
Canada the limit is
0.08
percent, and in
some other countries it’s lower than
that. The BAC will be over
0.10
percent
after three to six drinks (in one hour).
Of
course, as we’ve seen, it depends
on
how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But it’s very important to keep in mind
that the ability
to
drive is affected well
below a BAC
of
0.10
percent. Research
shows that the driving
skills
of many
V
people are impaired at a BAC
approaching
0.05
percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers
are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05
percent. Statistics show that the chance
of
being in an accident increases sharply
for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.05
percent or above.
A
driver with
a
BAC
level
of
0.06
percent (three beers
in
one
hour for a 180-pound or
82
kg person)
has doubled his or her chance
of
having
an accident. At a BAC level
of
0.10
percent, the chance of that driver having
an accident
is
six times greater; at
a
level of
0.15
percent, the chances are
twenty-five times greater! And, the
body takes about an hour to rid itself
of
the alcohol in one drink.
No
amount of
coffee or number
of
cold showers will
speed that up.
4
“I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer.
What if there’s an emergency, a need
to
take sudden action, as when a child
darts into the street?
A
person with a
higher
BAC
might
not
be able to react
quickly enough to avoid
the
collision.
There’s something else about drinking
and driving that many people don’t
know. Medical research shows that
alcohol
in
a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse. That’s especially
true for brain, spinal cord and heart
injuries. That means that if anyone who
has been drinking-driver or
passenger-is
in
a crash, the chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if that person had not been
drinking. And we’ve already seen that
the chance of a crash itself is higher for
drinking drivers.
’
Drinking and then driving
is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, and judgment will be
affected by even a small amount
of
alcohol. You could have a
serious-or even fatal-accident
if
you
drive after drinking. Please
don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or
if
you’re
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Control
of
a
Vehicle
You have three systems that make your
vehicle
go
where you want it to
go.
They are the brakes, the steering and the
accelerator. All three systems have
to
do
their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving
on
snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of
those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. That means you can
lose control
of
your vehicle.
3
88I
C
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Braking
Braking action involves
perception time
and
reaction time.
First,
you
have to decide to push on the
brake pedal. That’s
perception time.
Then you have to bring up your foot and
do it. That’s
reaction time.
Average
reaction time
is about
%i
of
a
second. But that’s only an average. It
might be less with one driver and as
long as two or three seconds or more
with another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and eyesight all
play a part.
So
do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in
%
of
a second, a
vehicle moving at
60
mph
(100
km/h)
travels
66
feet
(20
m).
That could be a
lot
of distance in an emergency,
so
keeping enough space between your
vehicle and others is important.
154
b
V
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the surface
of the road (whether it’s pavement
or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet,
dry, icy); tire tread; and the condition
of
your brakes.
Most drivers treat their brakes with
care. Some, however, overwork the
braking system with poor driving habits.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some
people drive
in
spurts-heavy
acceleration followed by heavy
braking-rather than keeping pace
with traffic. This is a mistake. Your
brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will
wear out much faster if you do-a lot of
heavy braking.
_,.
1:
<.,
.
~
-<
,
,
,,I
,
Don’t “ride” the brakes
by
letting your
left foot rest lightly
on
the brake pedal
while driving.
c
L
“Riding”
your
brakes
can
1
cause
them
to
overheat
to
the
point
that
they
won’t
work well.
You
might
not
be
able
to
stop
your
vehicle in time
to
avoid
an
accident.
If
you
“ride”
your
brakes,
they
will
get
so
hot
they
will
require
a
lot
of
pedal
force
to
sIow
you
down.
Avoid
“riding”
the
brakes.
’
I
NOTICE
I
“Riding” the brakes wears them
out much faster. You would need
costly brake replacement much
sooner than normal, and
it
also
reduces fuel economy.
!
If
you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances, you
will eliminate a lot
of
unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If
your engine ever stops while you’re
driving, brake normally but don’t
pump your brakes. If you do,
the
pedal
may get harder to push down.
If
your
engine stops, you will still have some
power brake assist. But
you
will use
it
when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up,
it
may take longer to
stop and the brake pedal will be
harder to push.
Anti-Lock
Brakes
Your Pontiac has an advanced electronic
braking system that will help prevent
skidding.
Your
Driving and
the
Road
4nti-Lock
Brakes
(CONT.)
rhis light on the instrument panel will
;o
on when you
start
your vehicle. See
he
Index
under
Anti-Lock
Bruke
System
iVarning
Light.
-Iere's how anti-lock works. Let's say
he
road is wet. You're driving safely.
Suddenly an animal jumps out in front
Y'ou
slam
on
the
brakes. Here's what
lappens with
ABS.
4
computer senses that wheels are
;lowing down. The computer separately
works the brakes at each front wheel
md at the rear wheels.
The
anti-lock system can change the
)rake pressure faster than any driver
:ould.
The
computer is programmed to
nake the most
of
available tire and road
:onditions.
>f you.
'ou
can steer around the
obstacle
while
raking hard.
As
you brake, your
omputer keeps receiving updates on
{heel speed and controls braking
ressure accordingly.
1
A
*,nti-lock doesn't change the
-
--me you need to get your foot
up
to
the brake pedal.
If
you get
too close to the vehicle
in
front
of
you, you won't have time to apply
your brakes
if
that vehicle suddenly
slows
or
stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to
stop,
even though
you
have anti-lock brakes.
mmm
156
To
Use
Anti-Lock:
Don't pump the
brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for you.
When you
start
your vehicle and begin
to drive away, you may hear a
momentary motor
or
clicking noise and
you may even notice that your brake
pedal
moves
a little while this is going
on. This is the
ABS
system testing itself.
You also may hear this during a hard
stop.
I--
Tiction
Control
(omm)
Your vehicle may have a traction control
system that limits wheel spin. This is
especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The tractidn control system
works at low speeds only, such as when
you
accelerate from a stop. It applies
brake pressure
to
an individual wheel
that the system senses is about to spin.
You may feel the system working, or you
may notice some noise, but. this is
normal.
A
TRACTION
OFF
warning light in
the instrument cluster lets you know if
your traction control system
is
not
working. See the
Index
under
Traction
Control
System
Warning Light.
To
turn the system off, press the
TRACTION
CONTROL
switch on the
center console while the vehicle is
stopped. The
TRACTION
OFF
warning light will come on and
stay
on.
To
turn the system back
on,
bring
the
vehicle to a stop and press the switch
again. The warning light should
go
off.
The system will also
turn
itself on if
you
turn
your
ignition off and back on again.
157
Your
Driving and
the
Road
Disc
Brake
Wear
Indicators
Your Pontiac has front disc brakes and
rear drum brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads
are
worn and new pads are
needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is
moving (except when you are pushing
on the brake pedal
firmly).
I
bAU
I
IUIV
Continuing
to
drive
with worn-out
brake
pads
could
result
in
costly
brake
repair.
I
Some driving conditions or climates
may cause a brake squeal when the
brakes
are
first applied
or
lightly
applied. This does
not
mean something
is wrong with your brakes.
Rear Drum Brakes
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear
indicators, but
if
you ever hear a rear
brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake
linings inspected. Also, the rear brake
drums should be removed and inspected
each time the tires are removed for
rotation or changing. When you have the
front brakes replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced
as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does
not return to normal height, or if there
is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This
could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake
stop, your brakes adjust for wear. If you
rarely make a moderate or heavier stop,
then your brakes might not adjust
correctly. If you drive in that way,
then-very carefully-make a few
moderate brake stops about every
1,000
miles
(1
600
km),
so
your brakes will
adjust properly.
Braking In Emergencies
Use your anti-lock braking system when
you need to. With anti-lock, you can
steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best
braking.
159
...
Your Driving
and
the
Road
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more
effort.
Variable
Effort
Steering
If your vehicle is equipped with this
option, you have a variable effort
steering system that eases steering effort
at speeds less than
20
mph
(32
Wh).
This is particularly useful when parking
your vehicle.
Steering Tips-Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
A
lot of the “driver lost control”
accidents mentioned on the news happen
on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of
us
is subject to the same laws
of
physics
when driving on curves. The traction
of
the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change
its
path when you
turn
the front wheels.
If
there’s no traction, inertia will keep the
vehicle going in the same direction.
If
you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on
wet ice, you’ll understand this.
mmm
160
The traction you can get
in
a curve
depends on the condition of your tires
and the road surface,
the
angle at which
the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re
in
a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp
curve. Then you suddenly accelerate.
Those two control systems-steering
and acceleration-can overwhelm those
places where the tires meet the road and
make you lose control.
What should you do if this ever
happens? Let up on
the
brake or
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that
you should adjust your speed. Of
course, the posted speeds are based on
good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you’ll
want to go slower.
If
you need to reduce your speed as you
approach a curve, do
it
before you enter
the curve, while your front wheels are
straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed
so
you can
“drive” through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
When you drive into a curve at night,
it’s harder to see the road ahead of you
because it bends away from the straight
beams of your lights. This
is
one good
reason to drive slower.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be
more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts
out
from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking-if
you can stop
in
time. But sometimes you
can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time
for evasive action-steering around the
problem.
Your Pontiac can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply your
brakes.
It
is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
161
‘Your Driving and
the
Road
Steering in Emergencies
(CONI)
An
emergency like this requires close
attention and a quick decision.
If
you
are holding the steering wheel at the
recommended
9
and
3
o’clock positions,
you can turn it a full
180
degrees very
quickly without removing either hand.
But you have
to
act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object. You
must then be prepared to steer back to
your original lane and then brake
to
a
controlled stop.
Depending
on
your speed, this can be
rather violent for an unprepared driver.
This is one of the reasons driving
experts recommend that you use
your
safety belts and keep both hands
on
the
steering wheel.
The fact that such emergency situations
are always possible is a good reason to
practice defensive driving at all times.
162
Off-Road
Recovery
You may find sometime that your right
wheels have dropped off the edge
of
a
road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
If the level of the shoulder is
only
slightly below the pavement, recovery
should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing
in
the
way, steer
so
that your vehicle
straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to
5/4
turn
until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then
turn
your steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
If the shoulder appears
to
be about four
inches
(100
mm)
or more below the
pavement, this difference can cause
problems.
If
there is not enough room to
pull entirely onto the shoulder and stop,
then follow the same procedures. But if
the right front tire scrubs against the
side of the pavement, do
not
steer more
sharply. With too much steering angle,
the vehicle may jump back onto the road
with
so
much steering input that
it
crosses over into the oncoming traffic
before you can bring it back under
control. Instead, ease off again on the
accelerator and steering input, straddle
the pavement once more, then
try
again.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass
another on a two-lane highway waits for
just the right moment, accelerates,
moves around
the
vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again.
A
simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle
on a two-lane highway is a potentially
dangerous move, since the passing
vehicle occupies the same lane as
oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or
a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face
to face with the worst of all traffic
accidents-the head-on collision.
So
here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road,
to the sides, and to crossroads for
situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful.
pass, wait for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement
markings, and lines.
If
you can see a
sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually
indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line
on
your side
of the lane or a double solid line, even
if the road seems empty of approaching
traffic.
vehicle you want
to
pass isn’t aware of
your presence, tap the horn a couple
of times before passing.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you
want to pass while you’re awaiting an
opportunity. For one thing, following
too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following
a
larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have
adequate space
if
the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
If
you suspect that the driver of the
When it looks like a chance to pass is
coming up, start to accelerate but stay
in the right lane and don’t get too
close. Time your move
so
you
will be
increasing speed as the time comes to
move into the other lane. If the way is
clear to pass, you will have a “running
start’’ that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass,
you
need only slow down and drop back
again and wait for another opportunity.
slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take
care that someone isn’t trying to pqss
you as
you
pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over
your shoulder and check the blind
spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane
change signal before moving out
of
the
If other cars are lined up to pass a
L
163
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Passing
(CONX:)
right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to
see its front in your inside mirror,
activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside
mirror is convex. The vehicle you just
passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.)
Try
not to pass more than one vehicle
at a time on two-lane roads.
Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
vehicle too rapidly. Even though the
brake lights are not flashing,
it
may be
slowing down or starting to
turn.
If
you’re being passed, make it easy
for the following driver to get ahead
of
you.
Perhaps you can ease a little to
the
right.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving
Loss
of
Control
Let’s review what driving experts say
about what happens when the three
control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleration) don’t have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what
the driver has asked.
In
any emergency, don’t give up. Keep
trying to steer and constantly seek
an
escape route or area
of
less danger.
Skidding
In
a skid, a driver can lose control
of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable care
suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to
your Pontiac’s three control systems. In
the braking skid your wheels aren’t
rolling. In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid too much throttle causes the driving
wheels
to
spin.
A
cornering skid and an acceleration
skid are best handled by easing your
foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
If
your
vehicle starts to slide (as when
you
turn
a corner on a wet, snow- or ice-covered
road), ease your foot off the accelerator
pedal as soon as you feel the vehicle
start
to slide. Quickly steer the way
you
want the vehicle to go. If you
start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle
will straighten out. As it does, straighten
the front wheels.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is
on
the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your
driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will
be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced
traction, try your best
to
avoid sudden
steering, acceleration, or braking
(including engine braking by shifting
to
a lower gear). Any sudden changes
could cause the tires to slide. You may
not realize the surface
is
slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues-such as
enough water, ice
or
packed snow
on
the road
to
make a “mirrored
surface”-and slow down when
you
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock braking system
(ABS)
helps avoid only the braking
slud. Steer the way you want to go.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than
day driving. One reason is that some
drivers are likely to be impaired-by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively. Remember, this is
the most dangerous
time.
Don’t drink and drive. (See the
Index
under
Drunken
Driving
for more on
this problem.)
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to
reduce the glare from headlights
behind you.
165
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Driving
at
Night
(CONT.:)
Since you can’t see as well, you may
need to slow down and keep more
space between you and other vehicles.
It’s hard
to
tell how fast the vehicle
ahead is going just by looking at its
taillights.
Slow down, especially on higher
speed roads, Your headlights can light
up only
so
much road ahead.
In
remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a
safe place and rest.
Night Hsion
No
one can see as well at night as in the
daytime. But as we get older these
differences increase.
A
50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as
much light
to
see the same thing at night
as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also
affect your night vision. For example, if
you spend the day in bright sunshine you
are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night.
But if you’re driving, don’t wear
sunglasses at night. They may cut down
on
glare from headlights, but they also
make a lot of things invisible that should
remain visible-such as parked cars,
obstacles, pedestrians, or even trains
blocking railway crossings.
You
may
want to put
on
your sunglasses after you
have pulled into a brightly-lighted
service or refreshment area. Eyes
shielded from that glare may adjust
more quickly to darkness back
on
the
road. But be sure to remove your
sunglasses before you leave the service
area.
You can be temporarily blinded by
approaching lights. It can take a second
or two, or even several seconds, for your
eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a
driver who doesn’t lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
headlights), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching
lights.
If
there is a line of opposing
traffic, make occasional glances over the
line
of
headlights to make certain that
one of the vehicles isn’t starting to move
into your lane. Once you are past the
bright lights, give your eyes time to
readjust before resuming speed.
mmm
166
High Beams
If the vehicle approaching you has its
high beams
on,
signal by flicking yours
to high and then back to low beam. This
is the usual signal to lower the headlight
beams. If the other driver still doesn’t
lower the beams, resist the temptation to
put your high beams
on.
This
only
makes two half-blinded drivers.
On a freeway, use your high beams only
in remote areas where you won’t impair
approaching drivers.
In
some places,
like cities, using high beams is illegal.
When
you
follow another vehicle on a
freeway or highway, use low beams.
True, most vehicles now have day-night
mirrors that enable the driver to reduce
glare. But outside mirrors are not of this
type and high beams from behind can
bother the driver ahead.
A
Few More Night Driving
Suggestions
Keep your windshield and all the glass
on
your vehicle clean-inside and out.
Glare at night is made much worse by
dirt on the glass. Even the inside
of
the
glass can build up a film caused by dust.
Tobacco smoke also makes inside glass
surfaces very filmy and can be a vision
hazard if it’s
left
there.
Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly. You might even want to keep
a cloth and some glass cleaner in your
vehicle if you need to clean your glass
frequently.
Remember that your headlights light up
far less of a roadway when you are in a
turn
or curve.
Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s
easier to pick out dimly lighted objects.
Just as your headlights should be
checked regularly for proper aim,
so
should your eyes be examined regularly.
Some drivers suffer from night
blindness-the inability to see in dim
light-and aren’t even aware
of
it.
167
Your
Driving and
the
Road
I
Driving in
the
Rain
Rain and wet roads can mean driving
trouble. On a wet road you can’t stop,
accelerate or turn as well because your
tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry roads. And,
if
your tires don’t have
much tread
left,
you’ll get even less
traction.
It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious
if
rain starts to fall while you
are driving. The surface may get wet
suddenly when your reflexes are tuned
for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder
it
is
to
see. Even
if
your windshield wiper
blades are
in
good shape, a heavy rain
can make
it
harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the
edge of the road, and even people
168
walking. Road spray can often be worse
for vision than rain, especially
if
it
comes from a dirty road.
So
it
is wise to keep your wiping
equipment
in
good shape and keep your
windshield washer
tank
filled. Replace
your windshield wiper inserts when they
show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of
rubber start
to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water
puddles or even going through some car
washes can cause problems, too. The
water may affect your brakes. Try to
avoid puddles.
But
if
you can’t,
try
to
slow
down before you
hit
them.
I
u
I
I(
\
Wet brakes can cause
l
accidents. They
won’t
work
w
in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose
control
of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle
of
water or a car wash,
apply your brake pedal lightly
until
your brakes work normally.
Some
Other Rainy Weather
Tips
Turn on your headlights-not just your
parking lights-to help make you more
visible to others.
Look for hard-to-see vehicles coming
from behind. You may want to use
your headlights even in daytime if it’s
raining hard.
Besides slowing down, allow some
extra following distance. And be
especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road
spray.
If
the road spray is
so
heavy
you
are actually blinded, drop back. Don’t
pass until conditions improve. Going
more slowly is better than having an
accident.
Use your defogger if it helps.
Have good tires with proper tread
depth. (See the
Index
under
Tires.)
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous.
So
much
water can build up under your tires that
they can actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough
and you’re going fast enough. When
your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little
or no contact with the road.
You might not be aware
of
hydroplaning.
You could drive along for some time
without realizing your tires aren’t in
constant contact with the road. You
could find out the hard way:
when
you
have to slow, turn, move out to pass-or
if you get hit by a gust
of
wind.
You
could
suddenly find yourself out of control.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it can if your tires haven’t much tread
or
if the pressure in one or more is low. It
can happen if a lot
of
water is standing
on the road.
If
you
can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other
vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher
speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast
rule about hydroplaning. The best
advice is to slow down when it
is
raining, and be careful.
Your
Driving and
the
Road
Driving in
Fog,
Mist and
Haze
Fog
can occur
with
high humidity or
heavy frost. It can be
so
mild that you
can see through it for several hundred
feet (meters). Or it might be
so
thick
that you can see only a
few
feet (meters)
ahead. It may come suddenly to an
otherwise clear road. And
it
can be a
major hazard.
When you drive into a fog patch, your
visibility will be reduced quickly. The
biggest dangers are striking the vehicle
ahead or being struck by the one
behind. Try to “read” the fog density
down the road. If the vehicle ahead
starts
to become less clear or, at night, if
the taillights are harder to see, the fog is
probably thickening. Slow down to give
traffic behind you a chance to slow
down.
170
mm.
Everybody then has a better chance to
avoid hitting the vehicle ahead.
A
patch of dense fog may extend only
for a few feet (meters) or for miles
(kilometers); you can’t really tell while
you’re
in
it. You can only treat the
situation
with
extreme care.
One common fog condition-sometimes
called mist or ground fog-can happen
in
weather that seems perfect, especially
at night or in the early morning
in
valley
and low, marshy areas. You can be
suddenly enveloped
in
thick, wet haze
that may even coat your windshield. You
can often spot these fog patches or mist
layers with your headlights. But
sometimes they can be waiting for you
as you come over a
hill
or dip into a
shallow valley.
Start
your windshield
wipers and washer to help clear
accumulated road dirt. Slow down
carefully.
Tips
on Driving in Fog
If you get caught
in
fog, turn your
headlights on low beam, even
in
daytime. You’ll see-and be seen-
better. Use your fog lights.
Don’t use your
high
beams. The light
will
bounce off the water droplets that
make
up
fog and reflect back at you.
Use your defogger. In
high
humidity,
even a light buildup of moisture on the
inside of the glass will cut down on your
already limited visibility. Run your
windshield wipers and washer
occasionally. Moisture can build up on
the outside glass, and what seems to be
fog may actually be moisture on the
outside of your windshield.
Treat dense fog as an emergency. Try to
find a place to pull off the road.
Of
course you want to respect another’s
property, but you might need to put
something
between
you
and moving
vehicles-space, trees, telephone poles,
a private driveway, anything that
removes
you
from other traffic.
If
visibility is near zero and you must
stop but
are
unsure whether you are
away from the road,
turn
your lights on,
start
your hazard warning flashers, and
sound your
horn
at intervals or when
you hear approaching traffic.
Pass
other vehicles in fog only if you
can see far enough ahead to pass safely.
Even then, be prepared to delay your
pass if you suspect the fog
is
worse up
ahead.
If
other vehicles try
to
pass you,
make it easy for them.
City
Driving
One
of
the biggest problems with city
streets
is
the amount of traffic on them.
You’ll want to watch out for what the
other drivers are doing and
pay
attention
to traffic signals.
Here are ways
to
increase your safety
in
city driving:
Know
the best way
to
get to where you
are
going.
Try
not to drive around
trying to pick out a familiar street or
landmark. Get a city map and plan
your trip into an unknown part
of
the
city just as you would for a cross-
country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and
crisscross
most
large cities. You’ll save
time and energy. (See the next section,
Freeway
Driving.)
Treat a green light as a warning
signal.
A
traffic light is there because
the corner is busy enough
to
need it.
When a light turns green, and just
before you
start
to move, check both
ways for vehicles that have not cleared
the intersection or may be running the
red light.
remember that they are for ideal road,
weather and visibility conditions. You
may need to drive below the
posted
limit in bad weather or when visibility
is
especially poor.
clear of intersections when you see or
hear emergency vehicles.
Obey
all
posted speed limits. But
Pull
to
the right (with care) and stop
171
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Fmeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called
thruways, parkways, expressways,
turnpikes,
or
superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have
their
own
special rules.
The most important advice
on
freeway
driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep
to the right. Drive at the same speed
most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane
on
a freeway as a passing lane.
Entering the Freeway
At the entrance there is usually a ramp
that leads to the freeway.
If
you have a
clear view of the freeway as you drive
along the entrance ramp, you should
begin
to
check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the
flow.
If
traffic is light, you may have
no
problem. But if it is heavy, find a gap as
you move along the entering lane and
time your approach. Try to merge into
the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch
on
your turn signal, check your
rearview mirrors as you move along,
and glance over your shoulder as often
as necessary. Try to blend smoothly
with
the
traffic flow.
Driving on the Freeway
Once you are
on
the
freeway, adjust
your speed to the posted limit or to the
prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the
right lane unless you want to pass.
If
you are on a two-lane freeway, treat the
right lane as the slow lane and the
left
lane as the passing lane.
If
you are
on
a three-lane freeway, treat
the right lane as the slower-speed
through lane, the middle lane as the
higher-speed through lane, and the left
lane as the passing lane.
Before changing lanes, check your
rearview
mirrors.
Then use your
turn
signal. Just before you leave the lane,
glance quickly over your shoulder to
make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
...
172
If you are moving from an outside to a
center lane on a freeway having more
than two lanes, make sure another
vehicle isn't about to move into the same
spot. Look at the vehicles two lanes
over and watch for telltale signs: turn
signals flashing, an increase in speed, or
moving toward the edge
of
the lane. Be
prepared to delay your move.
Once you are moving on the freeway,
make certain you allow a reasonable
following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
Leaving
the
Freeway
When
you
want to leave the freeway,
move to the proper lane well in advance.
Dashing across lanes at the last minute
is dangerous.
If
you
miss
your exit do
not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
At each exit point is a deceleration lane.
Ideally it should be long enough for you
to enter it at freeway speed (after
signaling, of course) and then do your
braking before moving onto the exit
ramp. Unfortunately, not all deceleration
lanes are long enough-some are too
short for all the braking. Decide when
to start braking.
If
you must brake on
the through lane, and if there is traffic
close behind you, you can allow a little
extra time and flash your brake lights (in
addition to your turn signal) as extra
warning that you are about to slow
down and exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes
quite sharply. The exit speed is usually
posted. Reduce your speed according to
your speedometer, not to your sense of
motion. After driving for any distance at
higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually
are. For example,
40
mph
(65
km/h)
might seem like only
20
mph
(32
Wh).
Obviously, this could lead to serious
trouble on a ramp designed for
20
mph
(32
km/h)!
Your
Driving and
the
Road
Driving
a
Long Distance
Although most long trips today are
made on freeways, there are still many
made on regular highways.
Long-distance driving on freeways and
regular highways
is
the same in some
ways. The trip has to be planned and the
vehicle prepared, you drive
at
higher-
than-city speeds, and there are longer
turns
behind the wheel. You’ll enjoy
your trip more if
you
and your vehicle
are
in good shape. Here are some tips
for a successful long trip.
174
Before Leaving on
a
Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready.
Try
to
be well Here are some things you can check
rested. If you must start when you’re not
fresh-such as after a day’s work-don’t
plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable
clothing and shoes you can easily drive
in.
Is
your vehicle ready for a long trip?
If
you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s
ready to go. If it needs service, have it
done before starting out.
Of
course,
you’ll find experienced and able service
experts in Pontiac dealerships all across
North America. They’ll be ready and
willing to help if you need it.
before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid:
Is
the
reservoir full? Are all windows clean
inside and outside?
shape?
Have you checked all levels?
lenses clean?
safe, trouble-free trip.
Is
the tread
good enough for long-distance
driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
weather outlook along your route?
Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps:
Do
you have up-to-date maps?
Wiper Blades:
Are they in good
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:
Lights:
Are they all working? Are the
Tires:
They are vitally important to a
Weather Forecasts:
What’s the
3n
the
Road
Mess
you
are the only driver, it is
;ood to share the driving task with
Ithers. Limit turns behind the wheel to
ibout 100 miles
(160
km)
or two hours
it
a sitting. Then, either change drivers
x
stop for some refreshment like coffee,
:ea or
soft
drinks and some limbering
lp. But do stop and move around. Eat
lightly along the way. Heavier meals
:end to make some people sleepy.
3n
two-lane highways or undivided
multilane highways that do not have
;ontrolled access, you’ll want to watch
for some situations not usually found on
freeways. Examples are: stop signs and
signals, shopping centers with direct
access to the highway, no passing zones
and school zones, vehicles turning left
and right off the road, pedestrians,
cyclists, parked vehicles, and even
animals.
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as
“highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain
falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack
of
awareness,
o
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch
of road with the same scenery, along
with the hum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can
make you sleepy. Don’t
let
it happen to
you! If it does, your vehicle can leave
the road in
less than
a
second,
and you
could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway
hypnosis? First, be aware that it can
happen.
Then here are some tips:
Mike sure your vehicle is well
ventilated, with a comfortably cool
interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road
ahead and to the sides. Check your
rearview mirrors frequently and your
instruments from time to time. This
can help you avoid a fixed stare.
Wear good sunglasses in bright light.
Glare can cause drowsiness. But don’t
wear sunglasses at night. They will
drastically reduce your overall vision
at the very time you need all the
seeing power
you
have.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into
a rest, service, or parking area and
take a nap, get some exercise, or both.
For safety, treat drowsiness on the
highway as an emergency.
As
in any driving situation, keep pace
with traffic and allow adequate
following distances.
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Hi//
and
Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is
different from driving
in
flat or rolling
terrain.
If
you drive regularly
in
steep
country, or if you’re planning to visit
there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle
in
good shape.
Check all fluid levels and also the
brakes, tires, cooling system and
transaxle. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
Know how to
go
down hills. The most
important thing to know is this: let
your engine
do
some
of
the slowing
down. Don’t make your brakes do
it
all. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill. That way,
you will slow down without excessive
use
of your brakes.
176
If
you don’t shift down, your
brakes could get
so
hot that
they wouldn’t work well.
You
would then have poor braking or
even
none
going down a hill.
You
could crash. Shift down
to
let your
engine
assist
your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
I
CAUTION
I
Know how to
go
uphill. Shift down to
D
(Drive). This will help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can
,
climb the
hill
better.
Stay
in
your own lane when driving
on
two-lane roads
in
hills or mountains.
Don’t swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let
you
stay
in
your own lane. That
way, you won’t be surprised by a
vehicle coming toward you
in
the
same lane.
It takes longer to pass another vehicle
when you’re going uphill. You’ll want
to leave extra room to pass.
If
a
vehicle
is
passing you and doesn’t have
enough room, slow down to make
it
easier for the other vehicle to get by.
As
you go over the top of a hill, be
alert. There could be something in
your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on
mountains that warn of special
problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no passing zones,
a
falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert
to these and take appropriate action.
problems. See the
Index
under
Winter
Driving.
Winter driving can present special
Parking
on
Hills
Hills
and
mountains mean spectacular
scenery. But please be careful where you
stop if you decide
to
look at the view or
take pictures.
Look
for pull-offs or
parking areas provided for scenic
viewing.
Another part of
this
manual tells how to
use your parking brake (see the
Idex
under
Parking Brake).
But on a
mountain or steep hill, you can
do
one
more thing. You can turn your front
wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling
downhill or out into traffic.
Here’s how
:
Parking
Downhill
Turn your wheels to the right.
You don’t have to
jam
your tires against
the curb,
if
there
is
a curb.
A
gentle
contact
is
all you need.
...
your
Driving
and
the
Road
Parking
on
Hills
(CONI:)
Parking
Uphill
If
there is a curb, turn your wheels to
the left
if
the curb is at the right side
of
your vehicle.
178
If
you’re going uphill
on
a one-way
street and
you’re
parking
on
the left
side, your wheels should point to the
right.
If
there
is
no curb when you’re parking
uphill, turn the wheels to the right.
If
there is
no
curb when you’re parking
uphill
on
the left side
of
a one-way
street, your wheels should be turned to
the left.
Toque
Lock
If
you
are parking on a hill and
you
don’t shift your transaxle into
P
(Park)
properly, the weight of the vehicle may
put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transaxle.
You
may find it difficult
to
pull the
shift
lever out
of
P
(Park).
This is called “torque lock.”
To
prevent
torque lock, always be sure
to
shift into
P
(Park) properly before
you
leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see the
Index
under
Shifing
Into
P
(Park).
When you are ready
to
drive, move the
shift lever
out
of
P
(Park)
before
you
release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need
to
have another vehicle
push
yours a
little uphill
to
take some
of
the pressure
from the transaxle,
so
you
can pull the
shift lever out
of
P
(Park).
Winter
Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your Pontiac in good shape for
winter. Be sure your engine coolant
mix is correct.
Snow tires can help in loose snow, but
they may give
you
less traction on ice
than regular tires.
If
you do
not
expect
to
be driving in deep snow, but may
have to travel over ice,
you
may not
want to switch to snow tires at all.
I
You may want to put winter
emergency supplies in your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush
or
broom, a supply of windshield
washer fluid, a rag,
some
winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple
of
reflective
warning triangles. And,
if
you will be
driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of
old carpet
or
a couple
of
burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure
you
properly secure these items
in
your
vehicle.
17s
...
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
Driving
on
Snow
or
Ice
Most of the time, those places where
your tires meet the road probably have
good
traction.
However, if there
is
snow or
ice
between your
tires
and the road, you can
have a
very
slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot
less
traction or “grip” and
will need to be very
careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet
ice.”
Very
cold snow or ice can be slick
and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be
even more trouble because it may offer
the
least traction
of
all. You can get
“wet” ice when it’s about freezing
(32°F;
OOC)
and freezing rain begins to
fall.
Try
to
avoid driving on wet ice
until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition-smooth ice,
packed, blowing or loose snow-drive
with caution. Accelerate gently.
Try
not
to break the fragile traction.
If
you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will
spin and polish the surface under the
tires even more.
If
you have the traction
control
system,
it will improve your
ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has a traction control system, you’ll
want
to
slow down and adjust
your
driving to the road conditions.
See
the
Index
under
Traction Control.
Your
anti-lock brakes improve your
ability to make a hard
stop
on
a
slippery
road. Even though you have the anti-
lock braking
system,
you’ll want
to
begin stopping sooner
than
you would
on dry pavement. See the
Idex
under
Anti-Lock Brake System.
Allow greater following distance
on
I
any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road
might be fine until you
hit
a spot that’s
covered with ice.
On
an otherwise
clear road, ice patches may appear
in
shaded areas where the sun can’t
reach: around clumps
of
trees, behind
buildings,
or
under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a
curve
or
an
overpass
may
remain icy when the
surrounding
roads
are clear. If you
see
a patch
of
ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it.
Try
not
to
brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
..I
180
If
You’re
Caught
in
a
Bli’ard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you
could be in a serious situation.
You
should probably stay with your vehicle
unless you know for sure that
you
are
near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to
do
to
summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert
police that you’ve been stopped by the
snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a
blanket around you.
If
you have no
blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap
bags, rags, floor mats-anything you
can wrap around yourself
or
tuck
under your clothing to keep warm.
but be careful.
You can run the engine to keep warm,
cause deadly
CO
(carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You
can’t see
it
or smell it,
so
you
might not know
it
was
in
your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking your
exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be
sure
snow doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the
side of the vehicle that’s away from
the wind. This
will
help keep CO
out.
Your
Driving
and
the
Road
If
bu’re
Caught
in
a
Blizzard
(CONT)
Run your engine only as long as you
must. This saves fuel. When you run
the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That
is,
push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel
for the heat that you get and it keeps
the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle and possibly for signaling later
on with your headlights. Let the heater
run
for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close
the window almost all the way to
preserve the heat.
Start
the engine
again
and
repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. But do it as little as possible.
Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To
help keep warm, you can get out
of
the vehicle and do some fairly
vigorous exercises every half-hour
or
so
until help comes.
If
You’re
Stuck
in
Deep
Snow
This manual explains how to get the
vehicle out of deep snow without
damaging it. See the
Index
under
Rocking
Your
Whicle.
Towing
a
Tmiler
I
If
you don't use the correct
\
equipment and drive properly,
you can lose control when you pull
a trailer. For example, if the trailer
is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well-or even at all. You and
your passengers could be seriously
injured. Pull a trailer only if you
have followed all the steps in this
section.
NOTICE
I
I;
Pulling a trailer improperly can
:
__
damage your vehicle and result in'
;'
costly repairs not covered by your
follow the advice in this section.
Your Pontiac can tow a trailer, unless it
is equipped with the
3800
Supercharged
Engine (Code
1).
Do
not attempt to tow
a trailer
if
equipped with the
3800
Supercharged Engine (Code
1).
To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle,
you
should
read the information in
Weight
of
the
Trailer
that appears later in this section.
But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, durability,
and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it
has to be used properly.
That's the reason for this section.
In
it
are many time-tested, important
trailering tips and safety rules. Many
of
these
are
important for your safety and
that of your passengers.
So
please read
this section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. What's more, the trailer adds
considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
Your Driving and
the
Road
If
bu
Do Decide
to
Pulla Trailer
If you do, here are some important
points.
There are many different laws having
to do with trailering. Make sure your
rig will be legal, not only where you
live but also where you’ll be driving.
A
good source for this information can
be
state
or provincial police.
trailer will weigh
2,000
pounds
(900
kg)
or less. You should always use a sway
control if your trailer will weigh more
than
2,000
pounds
(900
kg).
You
can ask
a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500
miles
(804
km)
your new vehicle is
driven. Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
Consider using
a
sway control if your
Then, during the first
500
miles
(804
km)
that you tow a trailer, don’t
drive over
50
mph
(80
km/h) and
don’t make
starts
at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Three important considerations have
to do with weight:
Weight
of
the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than
1,000
pounds
(450
kg) unless you have the
special optional
3,000
pound
(1
360
kg)
towing package. But even that can
be
too heavy. It depends on how you plan
to use your rig. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your
vehicle is
used
to pull
a
trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on
any special equipment that you have
on your vehicle. You can ask your
dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or write us at:
mmm
184
Pontiac Customer Services
Department
One Pontiac Plaza
Pontiac, Michigan 48340-2952
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario,
L1H
8P7
Weight
of
the
nailer
Tongue
The tongue load
(A)
of any trailer is
an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total, gross
weight of your vehicle. The gross
vehicle weight
(GVW)
includes the
curb weight
of
the vehicle, any cargo
you may carry in it, and the people
who will
be
riding in the vehicle. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the
GVW
because
your vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too.
See
the
Index
under
Loading
Your
&hide
for
more
information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
If
your vehicle is
not
equipped
to
tow
a trailer weighing more than
2,000
pounds
(900
kg), the trailer tongue
(A)
should weigh
10%
of the total
loaded trailer weight
(B).
If
your
vehicle
is
equipped with the optional
3,000 pound
(1
360
kg) towing
package, and you’re using a “dead-
weight” hitch, the trailer tongue
(A)
should weigh 10%
of
the total loaded
trailer weight
(B).
Or, if you have a
“weight-distributing” hitch, the trailer
tongue
(A)
should weigh
12%
of
the
total loaded trailer weight
(B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh
the
trailer and then the tongue, separately,
to see if the weights are proper.
If
they
aren’t,
you
may
be able
to
get them right
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
185
Your
Driving and
the
Road
I4
If
bu
Do
Decide
to
Pull
a
Trailer
(CONT.)
Total
Weight
on
Your
Vehicle’s
Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated
to the limit for cold tires. You will find
these numbers on the Certification
label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door (or, see the
Index
under
7ire
Loading).
Then be sure you don’t go
over the
GVW
limit for your vehicle.
186
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a
few
reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when
loaded,
will weigh more than
2,000
pounds
(900
kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-distributing
hitch and sway control
of
the proper
size. This equipment is very important
for proper vehicle loading
and
good
handling when you’re driving.
Will
you
have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle, when you install
a trailer hitch?
If
you do, then be sure
to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If
you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide
(CO)
from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle. (See
the
Index
under
Carbon
Monoxide
in
Exhaust.)
Dirt and water can, too.
The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a frame-
mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Driving witb a Traiiler
Safety
Chains
You
should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer
so
that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from
the hitch. Instructions about safety
chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough slack
so
you
can
turn
with your rig. And, never
allow safety chains
to
drag on the ground.
Tiai/er Brakes
If
your trailer weighs more than
1000
pounds
(450
kg) loaded, then it needs its
own brakes-and they must be adequate.
Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes
so
you’ll be able
to
install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do
not
try
to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems
won’t work well, or at all.
Towing a trailer requires
a
certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for
the
open road, you’ll want to get
to
know your rig. Acquaint yourself with
I
the feel
of
handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving
is
now a good deal longer and
not nearly
so
responsive as your vehicle
is by itself.
Before you
start,
check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector, lights, tires and mirror
adjustment.
If
the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the brakes
are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to
be sure that the load is secure,
and
that
the lights and any trailer brakes are still
working.
‘Your Driving and
the
Road
Driving
with
a
Tmiler
(CONX)
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that
require heavy braking and sudden
turns.
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer.
And, because you’re a good deal longer,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond
the passed vehicle before you can return
to your lane.
Backing
Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to
the
left, just move that hand to the
left.
To
move the trailer to the right,
move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have
someone guide you.
188
Passing
Making
’hrns
When you’re turning with
a
trailer,
make wider turns than normal.
Do
this
so
your trailer won’t strike
soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or
other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing
a
Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher
and extra wiring. The green arrows on
your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer
lights will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change
lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on
your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs
are still working.
Vehicles with the optional Lamp
Monitor System will warn you when a
bulb burns out. But when you plug
trailer lights into your vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not
let you know if one
of
your lights goes
out.
So,
when you have trailer lights
plugged in, be sure to check your
vehicle and trailer lights from time to
time to be sure they’re all working.
Once you disconnect the trailer lights,
your Lamp Monitor System again can
tell you if one
of
your vehicle lights is
out.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before
you
start
down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes
so
much
that they would get hot and no longer
work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down to
D
(Drive) and reduce your
speed
to around
45
mph
(70
km/h) to reduce the possibility
of
engine and transaxle overheating.
If
you are towing a trailer that weighs
more than
1,000
pounds
(454
kg), and
you have an automatic transaxle with
Overdrive, it’s best
to
drive in
D
instead
of
Overdrive (or, as you need to, a lower
gear). This will minimize heat build-up
and extend the life
of
your transaxle.
Parking on
Hills
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig could
start
to move. People can
be
injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on
a hill, here’s how to do it:
1.
Apply your regular brakes, but don’t
shift into
P
(Park) yet.
2.
Have someone place chocks under
the trailer wheels.
3.
When the wheel chocks are in place,
release the regular brakes until the
chocks absorb the load.
4.
Reapply the regular brakes. Then
apply your parking brake, and then
shift to
P
(Park).
5.
Release the regular brakes.
When
You
Are Ready
to
Leave
After
Parking
on
a Hill
1,
Apply your regular brakes and hold
the pedal down while you:
Start
your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2.
Let up on the brake pedal.
3.
Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
4.
Stop and have someone pick up and
of
the chocks.
store the chocks.
Your
Driving and
the
Road
Maintenance When Tmiler
Towing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you’re pulling a trailer. See
the Maintenance Schedule for more
on
this. Things that are especially
important
in
trailer operation are
automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, belts, cooling system, and
brake adjustment. Each
of
these is
covered
in
this manual, and the
Index
will help you find them quickly.
If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch
nuts and bolts are tight.
...
190
Here
you’ll find out what to do
about
some
problems that can occur
on
the road
.
Part
5
Problems
on
the
Road
...........................................
Hazard Warning Flashers 192
Jumpstarting
....................................................
193
Towing Your Pontiac
197
Engine Overheating 202
If
a
Tire Goes Flat 208
Changing a Flat Tire 210
Compactspare
...................................................
217
..............................................
...............................................
................................................
...............................................
If
You’re Stuck:
In
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
..........................
218
Problems
on
the
Road
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you
warn
others. They also let police know
you have a problem. Your front and rear
turn signal lights will flash on and off.
Press the button
in
to make your front
and rear turn signal lights flash on and
off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no
matter what position your key is
in,
and
even if the key isn’t in.
To
turn
off
the flashers, pull out on the
collar.
When the hazard warning flashers are
on, your turn signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can
set one up
at
the
side
of
the
road about
300
feet
(100
m)
behind your vehicle,
Jump
Starting
If your battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some
jumper cables
to
start
your Pontiac. But
please follow the steps here to do
it
safely.
Batteries
can
hurt
you.
They
-
L
be
dangernus
because:
*
'
:y
contain
acid
that
an
burn
0
They
contain
gas
that
can
They
contain
enough
electricity
If
you
don't
follow
these
steps
pyactly,
some
or
all
of
these
things
YQU.
explode
or
ignite.
to
burn
you.
Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that
To
Jump
Start Your Pontiac:
1.
Check the other vehicle. It must have
a
12-volt battery
with
a negative
charge system.
I I
If
the other system isn't a 12-volt
system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged.
193
Problems
on
the
Road
Jump
Starting
(CONT:)
2.
Get the vehicles close enough
so
the
jumper cables can reach, but be sure
the vehicles aren't touching each
other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you don't want.
*
You wouldn't be able
to
start
your
Pontiac, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
L
You
could be injured if
the
~
Jehicles
roll.
Set
the
parking
brake
firmly
on
each
vehicle. Put
an
automatic
transaxle
in
P
(Park)
or
a
manual
transaxle
in
N
(Neut]
.
-.
3.
Turn
off
the ignition on both
vehicles. Turn off all lights that aren't
needed, and radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
I
I
I
4.
Open the hoods and locate the
batteries.
If
you leave your radio on,
it
could
be badly damaged. The repairs
wouldn't be covered by your
warranty.
CAUTlON
An
electric fan can
start
up
I
I
I
even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Find the positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
terminals on each battery.
,
Using a match near a battery
-
b
can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. .Use a flashlight
if
you
need more light.
Be sure the batteries have enough
water. You don’t need to add water
to the Delco Freedom@ battery
installed in every new
GM
vehicle.
But if a battery
has
filler caps, be
sure the right amount
of
fluid is
there. If
it
is low, add water to take
care
of
that first. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Don’t get it
on
you.
If
you accidentally get it
in
your eyes
or
on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help
immediately.
5.
Check that the jumper cables don’t
have loose or missin.g insulation.
If
they
do,
you could get a shock. The
vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some things
you
should know. Positive
(+)
will go to positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
will
go
to negative
(-)
or a metal
engine part. Don’t connect
(+)
to
(-)
or
you’ll get a short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts, too.
Fans or other moving engine
running.
Problems
on
the
Road
Jump
Starting
(CONI)
6.
Connect the red positive
(+)
cable to
the positive
(+)
terminal of the
vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the
vehicle has one.
7.
Don’t let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to
the
positive
(+)
terminal
of
the good battery. Use a
remote positive
(+)
terminal
if
the
vehicle has one.
8.
Now connect the black negative
(-)
cable to the good battery’s negative
(-)
terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end
of
the
negative cable
doesn’t
go to the dead
battery.
It
goes to a heavy unpainted
metal part
on
the engine
of
the vehicle
with the dead battery.
9.
Attach the cable at least
18
inches
(45
cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as
good there, but
the
chance of sparks
getting back to the battery is much
less.
10.
Now start the vehicle
with
the good
battery and
run
the engine for a
while.
11.
Try to start
the
vehicle with the
dead battery.
If
it
won’t start after a
few tries, it probably needs service.
m..
196
1
2.
Remove the cables in reverse order
to prevent electrical shorting. Take
care that they don't touch each other
or any other metal.
Towing
Your
Pontiac
Try to have a
GM
dealer or a
professional towing service tow your
Pontiac. The usual towing equipment is:
(A)
Sling-type tow truck
(B)
Wheel-lift tow truck
(C)
Car carrier
If
your vehicle has been changed or
modified since it was factory-new by
adding aftermarket items like fog lamps,
aero skirting, or special tires and
wheels, these instructions and
illustrations may not be correct.
Before you
do
anything, turn
on
the
hazard warning flashers.
When
you
call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle can only be towed
with certain equipment, as described
later in this section.
drive.
vehicle.
lever.
damaged.
That your vehicle has fi-ont-wheel
The make, model, and year
of
your
Whether you can still move the shift
If there was an accident, what was
When the towing service arrives, let the
tow operator know that this manual
contains detailed towing instructions
and
illustrations. The operator
may
want to
see them.
197
Problems
on
the
Road
I
Towing
Your
Pontiac
(CONI:)
To
help avoid injury to you or
Ithers:
Never let passengers ride
in
a
vehicle that is being towed.
Never tow faster than safe or
posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts
not fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after
it
has been lifted by the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chains
on each side when towing a vehicle.
Never use
“J”
hooks. Use
T-
hooks instead.
198
When your vehicle
is
being towed, have
the ignition key off. The steering wheel
should be clamped in a straight-ahead
position, with
a
clamping device
designed for towing service.
Do
not use
the vehicle’s steering column lock for
this. The transaxle should be
in
Neutral
and the parking brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed
on
the
front wheels, unless you must.
If
the
vehicle must be towed on the front
wheels, don’t go more than
35
mph
(56
km/h) or farther than
50
miles
(80
km)
or your transaxle will be
damaged. If these limits must be
exceeded, then the front wheels have to
be supported on a dolly.
Towing
from
the
Front-
Vehicle
Hook-up
(EXCEPT
SSE
&
SSEI’)
Before hoolung up to a tow truck, be
sure
to
read all the information
on
Towing
Your
Pontiac
earlier in this
section.
1.
Attach T-hook chains into
the
bottom
slots
in the cradle behind the front
wheels, on both sides.
2.
Across sling chains, position a
4x4
wood beam against bottom
of
radiator support behind the front
bumper.
I
x6019
I
3.
Attach a separate safety chain around
the outboard end
of
each control
arm.
.r
Problems
on
the
Road
bwing from the Front-
I
L
A
r
X6019
@hick
Hook-up
(SSE
&
SSEi
ONLY)
Attach a separate safety chain around
lefore hooking up to a tow truck, be the outboard end
of
each control arm.
ure to read all the information on
bwing
Your
Pontiac
earlier
in
this
xtion.
Do
not tow with sling-type
equipment or hcia/fog light damage
will occur. Use wheel-lift or car
carrier equipment (additional
ramping may be required for car
carrier equipment). Use safety
chains and wheel straps.
To
help avoid damaging a vehicle
during a tow over rough surfaces,
install a towing dolly beneath the
wheels that would otherwise be on
the ground during the tow. This
will increase clearance between the
wheel-lift equipment and the
underbody
of
the
towed vehicle.
...
200
lowing
from
the
Rear-
Vehice
Hook-up
(ALL)
Before hooking
up
to a tow truck, be
sure to read all the information on
Towing Your
Pontiac
earlier in this
section.
1.
Attach T-hook chains on both sides
in
the slotted holes in the floor pan
support
rails just ahead
of
the rear
wheels.
2.
Position the lower sling crossbar
directly under the rear bumper.
3.
Attach a separate safety chain around
the outboard end
of
each lower
control arm.
r
201
mmm
I'
Problems
on
the
Road
Engine Overheating
You
will find a coolant temperature gage
or the warning light about a hot engine
on your Pontiac's instrument panel. See
the
Index
under
Coolant Temperature
Gage
and
Coolant Temperature Warning
Light.
202
If
your
engine catches
fire
because
you
keep driving with
no
coolant,
your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repai
not be covered
by
your warranty.
'
Steam is Coming from
Your
Engine:
Steam
from
an
overheated
,
engine can burn you badly,
even
if
you
just
open
the
hood.
Stay
away
hm
the
engine
if
you
see
or
hear
steam
coming
from
it. Just
turn
it
off
and
get
everyone
away
from
the
vehicle until itmols
down.
Wait until
there
is
no
sign
of
steam
or
coolant
before
opening
the
hood.
If
you
keep
driving when
your
engine is overheated, the liquids
in
it
can
catch
fm
You
or-others
could
be
badly burned.
Stop
your
engine
if
it
wetheats,
and
get
out
of
the
vehicle
until
the
engine
is
cool.
If
No
Steam is Coming from Your
Engine:
If you get the overheat warning but see
or hear no steam, the problem may not
be too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow
a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no
sign of steam, try this for a minute or
so:
1
.
Turn off your air conditioner.
2.
Turn your heater to full hot at the
highest blower speed and open the
window as necessary.
N
(Neutral).
3.
If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to
If
you no longer have the overheat
warning, you can drive. Just
to
be safe,
drive slower for about ten minutes.
If
the warning doesn’t come back on, you
can drive normally.
If
the warning continues, pull over, stop,
and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign
of
steam, you can
idle the engine for two or three minutes
while you’re parked, to see if the
warning stops.
But then,
if
you still have the warning,
TURN
OFF
THE ENGINE AND GET
EVERYONE OUT
OF
THE VEHICLE
until it cools down. You may decide not
to lift the hood but to get service help
right away.
203
Problems
on
the
Road
Engine Overheating
(CONK)
Cooling
System
When you decide it’s safe to
lift
the
hood, here’s what you’ll see:
(A)
Coolant recovery
tank
(B)
Radiator pressure cap
(C)
Electric engine fan
An
electric
fan under the hood
h
can
start
up
even
when
the
engine
is
not
running
and
can
injure
you.
Keep
hands,
clothing
and
tools
away
from
any
underhood
electric
fan.
If
the coolant inside the coolant
recovery tank is boiling, don’t do
anything else
until
it
cools down.
The coolant level should be at or above
the
FULL COLD
mark. If
it
isn’t, you
may have a leak
in
the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else
in
the cooling system.
I
I
1
Heater and radiator hoses, anc
-
other engine parts, can be
very hot. Don’t touch them.
If
you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a
leak.
If
you
run
the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed
before you drive the vehicle.
I
Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant isn’t
covered by your warranty.
..
.
204
should be running.
If
it isn’t, your
vehicle needs service.
How
to
Add
Coolant
to
the Coolant
Recovery Tank:
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but
the coolant level isn’t up to the
FULL
COLD mark, add a
50/50
mixture
of
clean water (preferably distilled) and a
proper antifreeze at the coolant recovery
tank.
See the
Index
under
Coolant
for
more information about the proper
coolant mix.
I
b-Au
I
IUN
If there seems to be no leak, check to
see
if
the electric engine fan is running.
Adding
only
plain water
to
If the engine
is
overheating, the fan
L
your cooling
system
can be
dangerous. Plain water, or some
other
liquid like alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant
mix
will.
Your vehicle’s coolant
warning
,k
L
You can
be
burned if you spill
coolant on
hot
engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are
hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant
on a hot engine.
system is set for the proper coolant
I
mix.
With plain water or
the
too
hot but you wouldn’t get the
overheat warning. Your engine
could
catch
fm
and
you
or
others
be
Use
a
mix
of
clean
water
and
a
proper
antifreeze.
When the coolant in the coolant
COLD,
start
your vehicle. If the
overheat warning continues, there’s one
proper coolant mix directly
to
the
more thing you can try. You can add the
radiator, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before
you
do it.
wrong
mix,
Your engine could get recovery
tank
is at or above
FULL
I
In cold weather, water can freeze
II
and crack the engine, radiator,
heater core and other
parts.
Use
the recommended coolant.
I
r
205
”
Problems
on
the
Road
i
'.
'k
I
Engine Overheating
(CONT.)
\
Steam and scalding liquids
From a hot cooling system can
3w
out and burn you badly. They
ale
under pressure, and if
you
turn
I
thl=
radiator pressure cap-even a
tle-they can come out at high
I
eed. Never turn the pressure cap
when the cooling system, including
the radiator pressure cap,
is
hot.
Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn. the pressure cap.
How
to
Add
Coolant
to
the
Radiator:
1.
You can remove the radiator pressure
cap when the cooling system,
including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly to
the left
until
it
first stops. (Don't
press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If
you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A
hiss means there is still some pressure
left.
2.
Then keep turning the pressure cap,
but
now push down as you turn
it.
Remove the pressure cap.
3.
Fill the radiator with the proper
mix,
up
to
the base
of
the filler neck.
4.
Then fill the coolant recovery tank to
5.
Put the cap back on the coolant
I
the
FULL COLD
mark. recovery tank, but leave the radiator
pressure cap
off.
207
'.
Problems
on
the
Road
I
Engine Overheating
(CONT.)
6.
Start
the engine and let it run until
you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. Watch out for the engine
fan.
7.
By this time, the coolant level inside
the radiator filler neck may be lower.
If
the
level is lower, add more
of
the
proper mix through the filler neck
until the level reaches the base of the
filler neck.
8.
Then replace the pressure cap. Be
sure the arrows on the pressure cap
line up like this.
Ifa
Tire
Goes
Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out”
while you’re driving, especially if you
maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to
leak out slowly. But
if
you
should ever
1
have a “blowout:’ here are a
few
tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If
a front tire fails, the flat tire will
create a drag that pulls
the
vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering
wheel firmly. Steer
to
maintain lane
position,
then
gently brake to a stop well
out of the traffic lane.
A
rear blowout, particularly on a curve,
acts much like a skid and may require
the same correction you'd use in a skid.
In any rear blowout, remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. Get the
vehicle under control by steering the
way you want the vehicle to
go.
It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer, Gently brake to a stop, well
off the road
if
possible.
If your tire goes flat, the next section
shows how to use your jacking
equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Air
lnflator
Sysfem
Some
vehicles have an air inflator
for
use in bringing tires up to the proper
pressure. The air inflator is located in
the trunk. The
ON
switch will work
even with the ignition off.
The air inflator comes with
a
kit that
includes a 20-foot hose and an air
pressure gage, as well as instructions
and special adapters for inflating things
like an air mattress or basketball.
Inflating something too much
can make it explode, and
you
or others could be injured. Be sure
to read the inflator instructions,
and inflate any object only
to
its
1
recommended pressure.
1
I
209
Problems
on
the
Road
Changing
a
Flat
Tire
If
a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and
wheel damage by driving slowly
to
a
level place. Turn
on
your hazard
warning flashers.
I..
r
-0
The following steps will tell
you
how
to
use the jack and change
a
tire.
The equipment
you’ll
need is in the
trunk.
1.
Turn the center retainer bolt
on
the
spare tire cover counterclockwise
to
remove it, then lift the tire cover.
2.
Remove the spare tire from the trunk.
3.
Open the jack storage cover
by
twisting the knob
%
turn counter-
clockwise.
211
m..
Problems
on
the
Road
Changing
a
Flat
Tire
(CONT.)
4.
Remove the jack and wheel wrench.
5.
If
you have wheel nut caps, remove
them.
6.
If
you have aluminum wheels, remove
the center cover that conceals the
wheel nuts by using the flat end
of
the wheel wrench to pry it off.
Do
not drop the cover or lay it face
down, as it could be scratched or
damaged.
Do
not use a hammer or mallet to
install the cover.
7.
If
your wheel has the special locking
lug nut, use the special adapter
supplied with your vehicle to remove
the locking wheel
nut
by turning
counterclockwise.
8.
Use the wheel wrench to loosen the
wheel nuts, but don’t remove them.
9.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack,
and rotate the wrench clockwise to
raise the jack head a few inches.
Problems
on
the
Road
I
Changing a
Flat
lire
(CONT.:)
10.
Near each wheel well is a notch in
the frame into which
to
put the jack
head. The front notch
is
10
inches
back from the front wheel well. The
rear notch
is
8
inches forward from
the rear wheel well. The wheel
wrench has these
8
and
10
inch
distances stamped on the handle.
Use the wheel wrench to measure to
the notch by flipping the socket into
the handle, then measuring from the
socket end of the wrench.
1
1.
Position
the
jack and raise the jack
head until
it
fits firmly on the ridge
in
the vehicle's frame nearest the
flat tire.
Do
not raise the vehicle
yet. Put the compact spare tire near
you.
1
I
I
1
2.
Raise the vehicle by rotating the
wheel wrench clockwise in the jack.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground
so
there is enough room for
the spare tire to fit.
Raising
your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned will damage
the vehicle or may allow the
vehicle to fall
off
the jack. Be sure
to fit the jack lift head into the
proper location before raising your
vehicle.
3.
Remove all the wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.
Rust
or
dirt
on
the
wheel,
or
b
on
the
parts
to which
it
is
fastened,
can
make the wheel nuts
become
loose
after
a
time.
The
wheel could come
off
and
cause
an
accident. When
you
change
a
wheel, remove
any
rust
or
dirt
from
the
places where
the
wheel
attaches
to
the vehicle.
In
an
emergency,
you
can use a cloth or
a
paper
towel to
do
this; but
be
sure
to
use
a
scraper
or
wire
brush
later,
if
you
need
to, to get all the
rust
or
dirt
off.
II
I
4.
Remove any corrosion from the
wheel bolts, mounting surface
or
spare wheel.
5.
Place the spare tire on the mounting
surface.
16.
Replace the wheel nuts with the
rounded end of
the
nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
nut
by hand
until the wheel is held against the
hub.
A
hTwer use oil
or
grease
on
-
aLdds or nuts. If you
do,
the
nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
215
Problems
on
the
Road
Changing
a
Flat
Tire
(CONI)
17.
Lower the vehicle by rotating the
18.
In a criss-cross sequence, tighten
wheel wrench counterclockwise
on
the wheel nuts
firmly.
the jack. Lower the jack completely. Incorrect wheel nuts or
improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to
become loose and even come off.
This could lead to an accident.
Be
sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be
sure to get the right
kind.
Stop somewhere as soon as you
can and have the nuts tightened
with a torque wrench to
100
pound-feet
(140
Nom).
mmm
216
Don’t
try
to
put
the
wheel cover on the
compact spare tire. It won’t
fit.
Store the
wheel cover in the trunk until you have
replaced the compact spare tire with a
regular tire.
Wheel covers won’t fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put
a
wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover
or the spare.
19.
Store the flat tire
as
far forward
in
the
trunk
as
possible. Store the jack
and wheel wrench
in
their
compartment in the trunk.
1
Storing
a
jack,
a
tire,
or
other
equipment
in
the
passenger
compartment
of
the
vehicle
could
cause injury.
In
a
sudden
stop or
collision,
loose
equipment
could
strike
someone.
Store
all
these
in
I
the
proper
place.
The compact spare
is
for
temporary use
only. Replace the compact spare tire
with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
See
Compact Spare Tire
later in this
section.
Compact
Spare Tire
Although the compact spare was
fully
inflated when your vehicle was new,
it
can lose air after
a
time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60
psi
(420
kPa). The compact spare is
made to
go
up to
3,000
miles
(5
000
km),
so
you can finish your trip and have
your full-size tire repaired
or
replaced
where you want. Of course, it’s best to
replace your spare with
a
fill-size tire as
soon as you can. Your spare will last
longer and be
in
good shape in case you
need it again.
r
Problems
on
the
Road
Compact Spare lire
(CONI)
Your anti-lock brake system warning
light may come on when you are driving
with a compact spare. See the
Index
under
Anti-Lock
Brake
System
Warning
Light.
Don’t use your compact spare on some
other vehicle.
And don’t mix your compact spare or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They
won’t fit. Keep your spare and its wheel
together.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand,
Mud,
Ice
or
Snow
What you
don’t
want to
do
when your
vehicle is stuck
is
to spin your wheels.
The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck,
but
you must use caution.
.I.
218
I
CAUTION
If you let your tires spin at
high speed, they can explode
and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That
could cause an engine compartment
fire or other damage. When you're
stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don't spin the wheels
above
35
mph
(56
km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
Spinning your wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the
tires. If you spin the wheels too
fast while shifting your transaxle
back and forth, you can destroy
your transaxle.
Rocking
Your
Vehicle
to Get it Out:
First,
turn
your steering wheel
left
and
right. That will clear the area around
your front wheels. Then shift back and
forth between
R
(Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as
little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on
the
accelerator pedal when
the
transaxle is
in
gear. If that doesn't get
you out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. If you do need to be
towed out, see the
Index
under
Towing
Your
Pontiac.
Notes
Part
6
I
.
COO25
Here you
will
find information
about the care of your Pontiac
.
This
part begins with service and fuel
information. and then it
shows
how
to
check important fluid and
lubricant levels
.
There
is
also
technical information about your
vehicle. and
a
section devoted to its
appearance care
.
Service
G
Appearance Care
Service
.............................
..................
222
Fuel
.........................................................
222
Engineoil
......................................................
231
HoodRelease
....................................................
227
Aircleaner
.....................................................
233
TransaxleFluid
..................................................
236
Enginecoolant
..................................................
238
Power Steering Fluid
..............................................
242
Windshield Washer Fluid
...........................................
242
Bulb Replacement
..............................................
246
Loading Your Vehicle
.............................................
248
Appearance Care
.................................................
257
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.................................
264
Add-on Electrical Equipment
.......................................
265
Fuses
&
Circuit Breakers
...........................................
266
Capacities
&
Specifications
.........................................
270
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
...............................
271
Fluids
&
Lubricants
...............................................
272
Replacement Bulbs
................................................
273
Brakes
.........................................................
243
Battery
..........................................................
245
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......................
.......
248
Tires
..........................................................
250
221
...
Service
&
Appearance
Care
AC’
Service
Your Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle
best and wants you to be happy with
it.
We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all
your service needs. You’ll get genuine
GM
parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your
GM
vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have
one
of
these marks.
Doing
Your
Own
Service
Work
If
you want to do some
of
your own
service work, you’ll want to get the
proper Pontiac Service Manual. It
tells you much more about how to service
your
Pontiac than this manual can. To
order the proper service manual, see the
Index
under
Service Publications.
You should keep a record with all parts
receipts and list the mileage and date
of
any service work you perform. See the
Index
under
Maintenance Record.
I
I
You
can
be
injured if
you
try
to
do
service
work
on
a
vehicle
without knowing enough
about
it.
Be
sure
you
ha!
-
uffcient
I
knowledge, experience, and the
proper replacement
parts
and
tools before
you
attempt
any
vehicle maintenance
task.
Be
sure
to
use
the
proper
nuts,
bolts,
and
other
fasteners.
“English” and
“metric”
fasteners
can
be
easily
confused.
If
you
use
the
wrong
Edsteners,
parts
can
later break
or
fall
off.
You
could
be
hup
r
If
you
try
to do service work
without knowing enough about
it,
your
vehicle could be damaged.
Fuel
The eighth digit
of
your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows the
code letter for your engine.
You
will
find the VIN at the top left
of
your
instrument panel. (See the
Index
under
&hide Identljication Number-.)
3800
Engine (Code
L):
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87
octane or higher. It should meet
specifications
ASTM
D4814
in
the U.S.
and
CGSB
3.5-92
in
Canada. These
fuels should have the proper additives,
so
you should not have to add anything
to the fuel.
m..
222
[n
the U.S. and Canada, it’s easy to be
sure you get the right kind of gasoline
‘unleaded). You’ll see “UNLEADED”
Pight on the pump. And only unleaded
aozzles will fit into your vehicle’s filler
neck.
Be sure the posted octane is at least
87.
[f
the octane is less than
87,
you may get
1
heavy knocking noise when you drive.
[fit’s bad enough, it can damage your
:ngine.
[f
you’re using fuel rated at
87
octane or
nigher and you still hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
But
don’t worry if you hear a little
inging noise when you’re accelerating
3r driving up a hill. That’s normal, and
vou don’t have to buy a higher octane
Fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy,
:onstant knock that means you have a
xoblem.
specifications
ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.
and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada. These
fuels should have the proper additives,
so
you should not have to add anything
to the fuel.
In the U.S. and Canada, it’s easy to be
sure you get the right kind of gasoline
(unleaded). You’ll see “UNLEADED”
right on the pump. And only unleaded
nozzles will fit into your vehicle’s filler
neck.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 91.
If the octane is less than 91, you may get
a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
(In an emergency, you may be able to
use lower octane-as low as 87-if
heavy knocking does not occur.) If
you’re using 91 or higher octane
unleaded gas and you still get heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
MTBE
is “methyl tertiary-butyl
ether:’ Fuel that is no more than
15
%
MTBE
is fine for your vehicle.
Ethanol
is ethyl or grain alcohol.
Properly-blended fuel that is no more
than
10%
ethanol is fine for your
vehicle.
Methanol
is methyl or wood alcohol.
Service
&
Appearance Care
:#el
(CONTI
Fuel that is more than
5
%
methanol
is
bad for your vehicle.
Don’t use it. It can corrode metal
parts
in
your fuel system and also
damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage wouldn’t be covered
under your warranty. And even at
5%
or less, there must be
“cosolvents” and corrosion
preventers
in
this fuel to help avoid
these problems.
bel
Capacity:
18
U.S.
Gallons
(68
L).
Ise unleaded fuel only.
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
Your use of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming
in
your engine and fuel system.
That helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly. It’s good for your vehicle, and
you’ll be doing your part for cleaner air.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. General
Motors recommends that you use
gasolines with these blending materials,
such as MTBE and ethanol. By doing
so,
you can help clean the air, especially
in those pa@ of the country that have
high carbon monoxide levels.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines.
These gasolines are specially designed
to
reduce vehicle emissions. General
Motors recommends that you use
reformulated gasoline. By doing
so,
you
can help clean the air, especially in
those parts of the country that have high
ozone levels.
You
should ask your service station
operators
if
their gasolines contain
detergents and oxygenates, and if they
have been reformulated to reduce
vehicle emissions.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
tf
you plan on driving in another
country outside the
U.S.
or Canada,
unleaded fuel may be hard to find.
Do
not use leaded gasoline.
If
you use
even one tankful, your emission controls
won’t work well or at all. With
continuous use, spark plugs can get
fouled, the exhaust system can corrode,
and your engine oil can deteriorate
quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen sensor
will be damaged. All of that means
costly repairs that wouldn’t be covered
by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company
that does business in the country where
you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following
address for advice. Just tell us where
you’re going and give your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors
of
Canada Ltd.
International
Export
Sales
P.
0.
Box
828
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 7N1, Canada
Fuel Door
Lock
(omoN)
On
SSE
and
SSEi
models equipped with
the Theft-Deterrent System option,
the
fuel
door is locked and unlocked
together with the power door locks.
Therefore, to unlock the fuel filler door,
you may use the outside door key lock,
the inside power door lock button, or
the
Remote Keyless Entry key chain
transmitter.
To
unlock the fuel door, just
unlock the driver’s door.
225
Service
&
Appearance Care
Filling
Your
Tank
The cap is behind a hinged door on the
left side of your vehicle.
Gasoline vapor is highly
flammable. It burns violently,
and that can cause very bad
I
injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re
ar gasoline or refueling your
vehicle. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from
gasoline.
I
To
take off the cap, turn
it
slowly to the
left (counterclockwise),
While refueling, hang
the
cap inside the
fuel door.
I
A
If
you
get gasoline
on
you and
L
then something ignites
it,
you
L.udd be badly burned. Gasoline
can spray out on you if you open
the
fuel
filler
cap
too
quickly. This
spray can happen if your tank is
nearly
full,
and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler
cap slowly and wait for any “hiss”
noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
When you put the cap back on, turn
it
to
the right
until
you hear a clicking noise.
m..
226
If you need a new cap, be sure
to
get the right type. Your dealer
get one for you. If you get the
wrong type,
it
may not
fit
or have
proper venting, and your fuel tank
and emissions system
might
be
damaged.
Fuel
Door
Manual Release
[f
your vehicle has a fuel door lock, the
Fuel door can be opened manually
in
;ase of an electrical power failure.
To
io
so,
first open the trunk. The release
mechanism is
on
the driver's side
of
the
vehicle, at the top
of
the trunk
2ompartment. Pull the tab to release the
fuel door.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
The following sections tell you how
to
check fluids, lubricants and important
parts
underhood.
Hood
Release
To
open the hood, first pull the hood
release handle inside the vehicle.
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Hood
Release
(CONT.)
Then go to the front
of
the
vehicle and
pull
up on the underhood release.
Lift
the hood.
Dm.
228
I
I
GAUTION
I
I
11
Qr
An
electric
fim
under
the
hood
can
start
up
and
injure you
even
when
the
engine
is
not
running.
Keep
hands,
clothing
and
tools
away
from
any
underhood
electric
fan.
lefore closing the hood, be sure all the
Her caps are on properly. Then
just
ull
the hood down and close it firmly.
hderhood light
bur parking lights or headlights must
le on for the underhood light to
unction when you open the hood.
3800
Engine
(CODE
L)
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
1.
Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
2.
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
4.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
5.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6.
Air Cleaner
7.
Engine Oil Dipstick
8.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
9.
Radiator Pressure Cap
1
0.
Battery
229
Service
&
Appearance
Care
.
...
..
.
3800
SC
Engine
(CODE
I)
When you open the hood, you'll see:
1.
Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
2.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
3.
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
5.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6.
Air Cleaner
7.
Engine Oil Dipstick
8.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
9.
Radiator Pressure Cap
1
0.
Battery
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil
every time you get fuel. In order to get
an accurate reading, the oil must be
warm and the vehicle must be on level
ground. Turn off the engine and give the
oil
a
few minutes to drain back into the
oil
pan.
If
you don’t, the oil dipstick
might
not
show the actual level.
To
Check Engine Oil:
Pull out the dipstick and clean
it
with a
paper towel or cloth, then push
it
back
in
all the way. Remove
it
again, keeping
the tip lower.
When
to
Add
Oil:
If
the oil is at or below the
ADD
line,
then you’ll need
to
add some oil. But
you must use the right kind. This
section explains what kind of oil to use.
For crankcase capacity, see the
Zr.z&x
under
Capacities
&
Specijicatiow.
Don’t add
too
much oil.
If
your
engine has
so
much oil that the oil
level gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could
be damaged.
I
Just
fill
it
enough to
put
the level
somewhere
in
the proper operating
range. Push
the
dipstick all the way
back
in
when you’re through.
231
Service
tS
Appearance Care
What Kind
of
Oil
to
Use
Look
for Three Things:
SG
“SG” must be on the
oil
container,
either by itself or combined with other
quality designations, such as
“SGICC,”
“SGICD,”
“SF, SG,
CC,”
etc. These letters show American
Petroleum Institute (API) levels of
1
quality.
If
you
use oils that don’t have the
“SG” designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered
by
your
warranty.
’,”,,
.
For best fuel economy and cold starting,
select the
lowest
SAE
viscosity grade oil
’;,:;:?,:!
for the expected temperature range,:?$’:&,:,
4
,
,,
IF
NEITHER SAE 5W-30
NOR
SAE
1OW-30
GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE
30
’
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
’
,
ABOVE
40
DEGREES
F
(4
DEGREES C).
.,
ANY OTHER GRADE
OIL
NOT RECOMMENDED.
DO
NOT
USE SAE
1OW-40,
SAE 20W-50
OR
’
i’
,,
SAE
low-30
As
shown in the viscosity chart,
SAE
1OW-30
is best for your vehicle.
However, you can use SAE
5W-30
if
it’s going to be colder than 60°F
(16°C) before your next oil change.
When it’s very cold, below
0°F
(-18”C),
you should use
SAE 5W-30.
These numbers on an oil container
show its viscosity, or thickness. Do
not use other viscosity
oils
such as
SAE
1OW-40 or
SAE
20W-50.
Energy Conserving
11
Oils with these words on the container
will help you save fuel.
This doughnut-shaped logo (symbol) is
used on most oil containers to help you
select the correct oil.
You
should look for this on the oil
container, and use
only
those oils that
display the logo.
GM
Goodwrench@ Oil
(in
Canada,
GM
Engine Oil) meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your
Pontiac dealer is ready to advise if you
think something should be added.
...
232
When
to
Change Engine
Oil
See
if
any one of these is true for you:
Most trips are less than 4 miles
(6
km).
It’s below freezing outside and most
trips are less than
10
miles
(16
km).
The engine is at low speed most of the
time (as
in
door-to-door delivery, or in
stop-and-go traffic).
You tow a trailer often.
Most trips are through dusty places.
If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, you need to change your oil
and
filter
every
3,000
miles
(5
000
km)
or
3
months-whichever comes first.
If none of them is true, change the oil
every
7,500
miles
(12
500
km) or
12
months-whichever comes first. Change
the filter at the first oil change and at
every other oil change after that.
Engine
Block
Heater
An engine block heater can be a big
help if you have to park outside
in
very
cold weather,
0°F
(-18OC) or colder. If
your vehicle has this option, see the
Index
under
Engine
Block
Heater.
What to
Do
with Used Oil Air Cleaner
things that have caused skin
1
cancer in laboratory animals. Don’t
let used
oil
stay
on your skin fbr
very long. Clean your skin and
nails with soaQ and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly throw away clothing or
rags containing used engine oil.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to
determine when to replace the air filter.
See the
Index
under
Scheduled
Maintenance Services.
Used oil can be a real threat to the
I
environment.
If
you change your own
oil, be sure
to
drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t
ever dispose of oil by pouring it on the
ground,
into
sewers, or into streams or
bodies
of
water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly
disposing
of
your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local
recycling center for help.
1%
CAUTION
Operating the engine with the
air cleaner
off
can cause you
uz
others
to
be burned. The air
cleaner not
only
cleans the
air,
it
stops flame if the engine backfires.
If
it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires,
you could be burned.
I
Don’t drive with it
off,
and
be
I
careful working on the engine with
I
the air cleaner
off.
I
If
the
air cleaner is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire.
And, dirt can easily get into your
engine, which will damage it.
Always have
the
air cleaner in
place when you’re driving.
...
Service
&
Appearance Care
4
Air
Cleaner
(CONT.)
To
Check
or
Replace
(3800 Engine):
1.
Unscrew the three wing screws in the
housing cover and pull back.
2.
Unscrew the clamp on the air intake
hose where the hose attaches
to
the
throttle body near the top
of
the
engine. Detach the hose
from
the
throttle body, then
pull
back the rear
of
the
housing cover.
3.
Remove the air filter.
4.
Be sure
to
install the air filter and
5.
Reattach the air intake hose and
replace
the
cover tightly.
tighten the clamp.
I..
234
To
Check or Replace
(3800
Supercharged Engine):
1,
Unsnap the three clips in the housing
cover and pull back.
2.
Unscrew
the
clamp on
the
air intake
hose where the hose attaches to the
throttle body near the top of the
engine. Detach the hose from the
throttle body, then pull back the rear
of the housing cover.
3.
Remove
the
air filter.
4.
Be sure to install the air filter and
5.
Reattach the air intake hose and
replace the cover tightly.
tighten the clamp.
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Automatic
Transax/e
Fluid
When
to
Check
and
Change:
A
good time to check your automatic
transaxle fluid level is when the engine
oil
is changed. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine when to change
your fluid. See the
Index
under
Scheduled Maintenance Services.
How
to
Check:
Because this operation can be a little
difficult, you may choose to have this
done at a dealership Service
Department. If
you
do it yourself, be
sure
to follow all the instructions here,
or
you could get a false reading on the
dipstick.
Too
much or too little fluid can
damage your transaxle.
Too
much
can mean that some of the fluid
could come
out
and fall on hot
engine parts, starting
a
fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if
you check your transaxle fluid.
Wait at least
30
minutes before checking
the transaxle fluid level if
you
have been
driving:
When outside temperatures are above
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic-especially
in
hot
While pulling a trailer.
90"
F
(32"
C).
weather.
To
get the right reading,
the
fluid should
be at normal operating temperature,
which is
180°F
to
200°F
(82°C
to
93"
C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving
about
15
miles
(24 km)
when outside
temperatures are above
50"
F
(10"
C).
If
it's colder than
50°F
(lO°C),
you may
have
to
drive longer.
To Check the Fluid Level:
Park your vehicle
on
a level place.
Place the shift lever in
P
(Park) with
With your foot on the brake pedal,
the parking brake applied.
move the shift lever through each gear
range, pausing for about three seconds
in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in
P
(Park).
five minutes.
Let the engine
run
at idle for three to
Then, Without Shutting
Off
the
Engine,
Follow
These Steps:
1.
Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push
it back in all
the
way, wait three
seconds and then pull it back out
again.
3.
Check both sides
of
the dipstick, and
read the lower level. The fluid level
must be in the crosshatched area.
4.
If
the fluid level is where it should
be, push the dipstick back in all the
way.
c
Service
&
Appearance Care
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(CONTJ
How
to
Add Fluid:
Refer
to
the Maintenance Schedule to
determine what kind
of
transaxle fluid to
use. See the
Index
under
Fluids
&
Lubricants.
If
the fluid level is low, add only enough
of the proper fluid to bring
the
level up
into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick. It doesn't take much fluid,
generally less than a pint
(0.5
L).
Don't
overfill. We recommend that you use
only fluid labeled DEXRON@-IIE,
because fluids with that label are made
especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRON@-IIE is not covered by your
new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid
level as described under
How
to Check.
When the correct fluid level is obtained,
push the dipstick back
in
all the way.
Engine Coolant
The following explains your cooling
system and how to add coolant when
it
is low. If you have a problem
with
engine overheating, see the
Index
under
Engine Overheating.
The proper coolant for your Pontiac
will:
Give freezing protection down to
Give boiling protection
up
to
262°F
Protect against rust and corrosion.
-34°F (-37°C).
(128"
C).
Help keep the proper engine
temperature.
a
Let the warning lights work
as
they
should.
I..
238
What
to
Use:
Use a mixture of one-half
clean
water
‘preferably distilled) and one-half
intifreeze that meets
“GM
Specification
1825-M,”
which won’t damage
aluminum parts. You can also use a
recycled coolant conforming to
GM
Specification
1825-M
with
a
complete
2oolant flush and refill. If you use this
mixture, you don’t need to add anything
:1
se
.
Adding
only
plain
water
to
your
cooling
system
can
be
wgerous.
Plain
water,
or
some
other
liquid
like
alcohol,
can
boil
:fore
the
proper
coolant
mix
will.
Your
vehicle’s
coolant
warning
system
is
set
for
the
proper
coolant
mix.
With
plain
water
or
the
-
wrong
mix,
your
engine
couId
get
too
hot
but
you
wouldn’t
get
the
overheat
warning.
Your
engine
could
catch
fire
and
you
or
others
could
be
burned.
Use
a
S0/50
mix
of
clean
water
and
a
proper
antifreeze.
If
you
use an improper coolant
mix,
your engine could overheat
and be badly damaged. The repair
cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
Too
much
water in the
mix
can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core
other parts.
Service
&
Appearance Care
A’
Adding Coolant
To
Check
Coolant:
When your engine is cold, the coolant
level should be between the
FULL
COLD
mark and
FULL
HOT.
When
your engine is warm, the level should be
up
to
FULL
HOT,
or
a
little
higher.
m..
240
If
you have the optional low coolant
warning light and it comes on when
your engine is running, you’re low on
coolant. Or, if you have the optional
Driver Information Center and the
warning
LOW
COOLANT
appears,
you’re low on coolant.
To
Add
Coolant:
If
you need more coolant, add the
proper
mix
at
the
coolant recovery
tank.
II
Turning the radiator pressure
1
-
1
cap when the engine and
raalator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out
and bum
you
badly. With the
coolant recovery
tank,
you
will
almost never have to add coolant at
the radiator. Never
turn
the
radiator pressure cap-even a
little-when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank,
but be careful not to spill it.
I
"-"
""IW
You
can be burned if you spill
L
coolant
on
hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Don't spill coolant
on a hot engine.
I
Radiator
Pressure
Cap
I
Thermostat
1,.
Your radiator pressure cap is a
15
psi
(105
kPa)
pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installed
to
prevent
coolant
loss
and possible engine
i.
damage from overheating. Be sure
the arrows on the cap line up with
the overflow tube on the radiator
..
Engine coolant temperature
is
controlled
by a thermostat in the engine coolant
system. The thermostat stops the flow
of
coolant through the radiator until the
coolant reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an
AC@ thermostat
is
recommended.
When you replace your radiator pressure
cap, an AC@ cap is recommended.
241
c
Service
&
Appearance Care
Power
Steering Fluid
How
to Check Power Steering Fluid:
Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick
with a clean rag. Replace
the
cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the
cap again and look
at
the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When the engine Compartment is hot,
When the engine compartment is cool,
the level should be at
the
H
mark.
the level should be at the
C
mark.
I..
242
I
What
to
Add:
Refer to
the
Maintenance Schedule to
determine what lund
of
fluid to use. See
the
Index
under
Fluids
&
Lubricants.
1
When adding power steering fluid
or making a complete fluid change,
always use the proper fluid. Failure
to use the proper fluid can cause
leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
To
Add:
Open the cap labeled
WASHER
FLUID
ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the bottle
is
full.
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacture^
*
Don’t
mix
water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cauL, ;he
instructions for adding water.
solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of
washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
expansion, which could damage the tank if it
is
completely full.
washer system and paint.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
%
full when it’s very cold. This a for
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your
Brake
Master
Cylinder
Your brake master cylinder
is
here. It is
filled with
DOT-3
brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in your master cylinder
might go down. The first
is
that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear.
When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up.
The other reason is that fluid
is
leaking
out of the brake system.
If
it is, you
should have your brake system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later
your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So,
it isn’t
a
good idea to “top off’ your
brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t
correct
a
leak.
If
you
add fluid when
243
Service
&
Appearance Care
I
Brake
Master
Cylinder
(CONI:)
your linings are worn, then you’ll have
too
much fluid when you get new brake
linings.
You
should add (or remove)
brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
,
If you have too much brake
hid,
it
can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough.
You
or
others could be burned, and your
engine could be damaged. Add
brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
244
When your brake fluid falls to a low
level, your brake warning light will
come on. A continuous chime will
sound if
you
try to drive with this
warning light on. See the
Index
under
Brake
System
Warning
Light.
What
to
Add:
When you do need brake fluid, use only
DOT-3
brake fluid-such as Delco
Supreme
ll@
(GM
Part
No.
1052535).
Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
DOT-5 silicone brake fluid can
damage your vehicle. Don’t use
it.
Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind
of
fluid.
For
example, just a few drops
of
mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts
so
badly that they’ll have to be
replaced.
Brake fluid can damage paint,
so
be careful not
to
spill brake fluid
on your vehicle.
Replacing Brake System Pants
The braking system on a modem vehicle
is complex. Its many parts have to be of
top quality and work well together if the
vehicle is to have really good braking.
Vehicles we design and test have top-
quality GM brake parts in them, as your
Pontiac does when it is new. When you
replace parts of your braking system-
for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you have to have new
ones put in-be sure you get new
genuine GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work
properly. For example, if someone puts
in
brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front
and rear brakes can change, for the
worse. The braking performance you’ve
come to expect can change
in
many
other ways
if
someone puts
in
the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Every new Pontiac has a Delco
Freedom@ battery.
You
never have to
add water to one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend a
Delco Freedom@ battery. Get one that
has the catalog number shown on the
original battery’s label.
Jump
Starting
For jump starting instructions, see the
Index
under
Jump
Starting.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle
for 25 days or more, take off the black
negative
(-)
cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery from
running down.
1
Batteries have acid that can
burn you and gas that can
explode.
You
can be badly
hurt
if
you
aren’t careful. See the
Index
under
Jump
Starting
for tips on
working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how
to
prepare your vehicle for longer storage
periods.
245
...
Service
&
Appearance Care
Halogen Bulbs
L
Halogen bulbs have
l
pressurized gas inside and can
if you drop or scratch the
bulb.
You
or others could be
'
jured.
Take special care when
llmdling and disposing
of
halogen
bulbs.
Headlight Bulb Replacement
For the type of bulb, see the
Index
under
Replacement
Bulbs.
1.
Remove the two screws from the top
2.
Lift the entire headlight housing and
of the headlight housing.
tilt it forward.
3.
Twist the bulb assembly
$/6
turn
and
4.
Unclip the bulb assembly from the
pull out the bulb assembly.
wiring harness and replace the bulb
assembly.
5.
Reverse steps
1-3
to replace the bulb
assembly and headlight housing.
Make sure
the
tab
(A)
is locked into
the slot
(B)
in the radiator support
before tightening the screws.
Taillight Bulb Replacement
For the type
of
bulb, see the
Index
under
Replacement
Bulbs.
1
.
In the trunk, remove the two plastic
nuts holding the carpeting in place.
2.
Pull the carpet away from the rear
corner
of
the trunk.
3.
Rotate the bulb housing turn and
remove it.
4. To
remove bulb,
push
in
and rotate it
counterclockwise.
5.
Replace the bulb.
6.
Reverse the steps to reassemble the
taillight.
Fog Light Bulb Replacement
If
you have fog lights, don’t change your
fog light bulbs unless
you
have the
proper aiming equipment. See your
Pontiac dealer if you have any further
questions.
247
Service
&
Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Replacement blades come in different
types and are removed
in
different ways.
Here’s how to remove the type with a
release clip:
1.
Pull the windshield wiper arm away
2.
Lift the release clip with a
from the windshield.
screwdriver and pull the blade
assembly off the wiper arm.
the wiper arm.
3.
Push the new wiper blade securely on
Loading bur Vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry. The
Tire-Loading Information label found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door tells
you the proper size, speed rating and
recommended inflation pressures for the
tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number
of people that can be in your vehicle and
the total weight that you can carry. This
weight is called the Vehicle Capacity
Weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-
installed options.
The other label is the Certification
label,
also
on the rear edge of the
driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel
and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, or
the
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load,
you
should spread it out. Don’t carry more
than
176
lbs.
(80
kg) in your trunk.
On vehicles equipped with electronic
level control, the rear of the vehicle
is
automatically kept level as you load or
unload your vehicle.
...
248
I
bAUIIUN
-
b
heavier than the
GVWR
or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs.
If
you
do, parts on your vehicle
can
break,
or it can change
the
way
your vehicle handles. These could
cause
you
to lose control. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
or components that fail because of
overloading.
I
If
you put things inside your vehicle-
like suitcases, tools, packages,
or
anything else-they
will
go as fast
as
the
vehicle goes. If you have to
stop
or
turn
quickly, or
if
there is a crash, they’ll
keep going.
-
b
vehicle can strike
and
injure
people in a sudden
stop
or
turn,
or
in
a
crash.
*
Put
things in the
trunk
of
your
vehicle.
In
a
trunk,
put
them as
far forward
as
you can.
Try
to
spread the weight evenly.
*
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside
the
vehicle
so
that
some
of
them are above
the
tops
of
the seats.
0
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it
whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat
folded
down
unless you
need
to.
I
249
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. These tires are warranted by the tire manufacturers and
their warranties
are
delivered with
every
new Pontiac. If your spare tire is a
different brand than your road tires, you will have a tire warranty folder from each
of these manufacturers.
I
CAUTION
~~~~ ~~
Poorly
maintained
and
improperly
used
tires
are
dangerous.
I
friction.
You
could
have
an
&-out
and
a
serious
accident..
See
the
I&
A
Overloading
your
tires
can
cause
werhe;atiqg
as
a
result
of
too
much
under
Lading
.bur
F.’ehick.
Underinflated
tires
pose
the
same
danger
as
werlioaded
tires.
The
resulfing
accident
could
cause
serious
injury.
Check
all
tires
fr\equently
to
maintain
the
recommended
pressure.
Tire
pressure
should
be
checked
when
the
tires
are
cold.
sudden
impact,
such
as
when
you
hit
a
pothole.
Keep
tires
at
the
recommended
pressure.
Worn,
old
tires
can
cause
accidents.
If
your
tread
is
badly
worn,
or
if
your
tires
have
been
damaged,
replace
them.
*
Overinflated
tires
are
more
likely
to
be
cut,
punctured,
or
broken
by
lnflation-Tire Pressure
The Tire Loading Information label
which is
on
the rear edge of the driver’s
door shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires, when they’re
cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than a mile.
...
250
Don't let anyone tell
you
that
,
1\
,~
,%$:
underinflation
or
overinflation
all right. It's not.
If
your tires don't
;1
When
to
Check:
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don't forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at
60
psi
(420
kpa).
How
to
Check:
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire pressure. Simply looking at
the tires will not tell you the pressure,
especially if
you
have radial tires-
which may look properly inflated even if
they're underinflated.
If your tires have valve caps, be sure to
put them back on. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire lnspection and Rotation
To
make your tires last longer, have
them inspected and rotated at the
mileages recommended in your Mainte-
nance Schedule. See the
Index
under
Scheduled Maintenance Services.
Use this rotation pattern.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust
the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire-Loading Information
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See the
Index
under
Wheel
Nut
Torque.
Service
&
Appearance Care
Tire Inspection and Rotation
(CONT)
r
st
or
dirt on a wheel,
or
on
tne
parts to which it is
stened, can
make
the wheel nuts
“dome loose
after
a time. The
wheel could come
off
and cause
an
..
-
cident
.
When you change a
wheel, remove any
rust
or
dirt
from places where
the
wheel
attaches to the vehicle.
In
an
emergency, you can use
a
cloth
or
a
paper towel to
do
this; but
be
sure
to use
a
scraper
or
wire brush
’
-kr, if you
need
to, to get all the
,,Adder
changing
a
Flat
Ere.
st
or
dirt off.
See
the
Index
I
...
252
When It’s Time for
New
Tires
One way to tell when it’s time for new
tires is
to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will appear when your
tires have only
2/32
inch
(1.6
mm)
or
less of tread remaining.
You
need a new tire if
You
can see the indicators at three
You can see cord or fabric showing
The tread
or
sidewall is cracked, cut
places around the tire.
through the tire’s rubber.
or snagged deep enough
to
show cord
or
fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because
of
the size or location of the
damage.
Buying
New
Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires
you need, look at the Tire-Loading
Information label. The tires installed
on
your vehicle when it was new had a Tire
Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) number
on
each tire’s
sidewall. When you get new tires, get
ones with that same TPC Spec number.
That way, your vehicle will continue to
have tires that are designed to give
proper endurance, handling, speed
rating, traction, ride and other things
during normal service
on
your vehicle.
If
your tires have
an
all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed
by a
“MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those
not having a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range,
speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original
tires.
I
CAUTION
A
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you
mix
tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a
crash. Be sure to use the same size
and type tires on all wheels. It’s all
right to drive with your compact
spare, though. It was developed for
limited use on your vehicle.
rn
Uniform
Tire
Quality
Grading
The following information relates
to
the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature
performance. (This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States.)
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate
of
the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded
150
would
wear one and a half
(1%)
times as well
on
the government course as a tire
graded
100.
The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences
in
road
characteristics and climate.
253
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Traction-A,
5,
C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are: A,
B,
and
C.
They represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
of
asphalt and concrete.
A
tire marked
C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning:
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking (straight-
ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
254
Temperature-A,
B, C
The temperature grades are
A
(the
highest),
B,
and
C,
representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation
of
heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade
C
corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No.
109.
Grades
B
and
A
represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than
the
minimum
required by law.
Warning:
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or
in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Those grades are molded
on
the
sidewalls
of
passenger car tires.
While the tires available as standard or
optional equipment on General Motors
vehicles may vary with respect to these
grades, all such tires meet General
Motors performance standards and have
been approved for use
on
General
Motors vehicles. All passenger type
(P
Metric) tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Wheel Alignment and
Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
iligned and balanced carefully at the
'actory to give you the longest tire life
md best overall performance.
:n
most cases, you will not need to have
jour wheels aligned again. However, if
jou notice unusual tire wear or your
iehicle pulling one way or the other, the
dignment may need to be reset. If you
lotice your vehicle vibrating when
hiving on a smooth road, your wheels
nay need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked
or badly rusted.
If
wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If
the wheel leaks air out, replace
it
(except some aluminum wheels, which
can sometimes be repaired). See your
Pontiac dealer if any of these conditions
exist.
Your dealer will know what kind of
wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset, and be mounted the same way as
the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them
only with
new
GM
original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure
you
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts for your Pontiac model.
A
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts,
or
wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling
of
your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which you
or others could be injured. Always
use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Service
&
Appearance Care
Wheel Replacement
(CONI:)
Used
Replacement Wheels
Putting a used wheel on your
\
vehicle is dangerous. You
I’t know how it’s been used or
how many miles
it’s
been driven.
It
could fail suddenly and cause an
accident.
If
you have
to
replace a
wheel, use a
new
GM
original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
...
256
Appearance care
A
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst
into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes
in
a closed space. When
you
use anything in a container to clean your Pontiac, be sure to follow the
instructions. And always open your doors
or
windows when you're cleaning
the inside.
Never
use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline Carbon Tetrachloride Turpentine
Benzene Acetone Lacquer Thinner
Naphtha Paint Thinner Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous-some more than others-md they can all damage
your vehicle, too.
I
Don't use any
of
these unless
this
manual says
you
can. In many
uses, they will damage your
vehicle:
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Service
Appearance Care
Cleaning the inside
of
bur
Pontiac
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid
of
dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl with a
clean, damp cloth.
Your Pontiac dealer has
two
GM
cleaners-a solvent-type spot lifter and a
foam-type powdered cleaner. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well.
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the
cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can-
before they set.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and
change to a clean area often.
A
soft
brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
Use solvent-type cleaners
in
a well-
ventilated area only.
If
you use them,
don’t saturate the stained area.
If a ring
forms
after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it
will set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on
Fabric
Vacuum and brush the area to remove
Always clean a whole trim panel or
any loose dirt.
section. Mask surrounding trim along
stitch or welt lines.
Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner
following the directions on the
container label.
Use suds
only
and apply with a clean
sponge.
Don’t saturate the material.
Don’t rub it roughly.
As
soon as you’ve cleaned the section,
use a sponge to remove the suds.
Rinse the section with a clean, wet
sponge.
Wipe
off
what’s left with a slightly
damp paper towel or cloth.
Then dry
it
immediately with an air
hose, a hair dryer or a heat lamp.
Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on
Fabric
First, see if you have to use solvent-type
cleaner at all. Some spots and stains will
clean off better with just water and mild
soap.
If you need to use it, then:
Gently scrape excess soil from the
trim material with a clean, dull knife
or scraper. Use very little cleaner,
light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning
should start at the outside of the stain,
“feathering” toward the center. Keep
changing to a clean section of the
cloth.
When you clean a stain from fabric,
immediately dry the area with an air
hose, hair dryer, or heat lamp to help
prevent a cleaning ring. (See the
previous
NOTICE.)
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy
or
Oily
Stains:
Like grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee with cream, chewing
gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils,
wax crayon, tar and asphalt.
Carefully scrape off excess stain.
Then follow the solvent-type
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and
instructions above.
asphalt will stain if
left
on a vehicle
seat fabric. They should be removed
as soon as possible. Be careful,
because the cleaner will dissolve them
and may cause them
to
bleed.
Non-Greasy
Stains:
Like catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit,
fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine,
vomit, urine and blood.
0
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then
sponge the soiled area with cool water.
If a stain remains, follow the foam-
type instructions above.
If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit
or urine, treat
the
area with a water/
baking soda solution:
1
teaspoon
(5
ml)
of baking soda to
1
cup
(250
ml)
of lukewarm water.
Finally, if needed, clean lightly with
solvent-type cleaner.
Combination
Stains:
Like candy, ice cream, mayonnaise,
chili sauce and unknown stains.
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then
clean with cool water and allow to
dry.
If
a stain remains, clean it with
solvent-type cleaner.
259
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Cleaning Vinyl or Leafher
Just use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub
with a clean, damp cloth
to
remove dirt.
You
may have to do it
more than once.
polish will stain if you don’t get them
off quickly. Use a clean cloth and
solvent-type vinyl/leather cleaner.
Things like
tar,
asphalt and shoe
Cleaning the
Top
of
fhe
Instrument Panel
Use
only
mild
soap and water to clean
the top surfaces of the instrument panel.
Sprays containing silicones or waxes
may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to
see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care
of
Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and
dry.
A
Do
not bleach or dye safety
A
belts. If
you
do,
it may
Deverely weaken them. In a crash
they might not be able to provide
adequate protectinrl. Clean safety
belts only with
1
d
soap and
lukewarm water
I..
260
Glass
Glass should be cleaned often. GM
Glass Cleaner (GM
Part
No.
1050427)
or a liquid household glass cleaner will
remove normal tobacco smoke and dust
films.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoid
placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be
scraped
off
later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the
inside of the rear window,
an
electric
defogger element may be damaged. Any
temporary license should not be
attached across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside
of
the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If
the windshield is not clear after using
the windshield washer, or if the wiper
blade chatters when running, wax or
other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside
of
the windshield with
GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami
Powder@ (GM
Part
No.
1050011).
The
windshield is clean if beads do
not
form
when
you
rinse it with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously
with a cloth soaked in full strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse
the blade with water.
Wiper blades should be checked on a
regular basis and replaced when worn.
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your
Pontiac
The paint finish on your vehicle
provides beauty, depth of color, gloss
retention and durability.
Washing
Your
Vehicle
The best way
to
preserve your vehicle’s
finish is to keep it clean by washing it
often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct
rays of the
sun.
Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand,
dish or car washing (non-detergent)
soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that
contain acid
or
abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and
not allowed
to
dry
on
the surface, or
they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft,
clean chamois or a
100%
cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
High pressure vehicle washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
261
888
Service
&
Appearance Care
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of
your Pontiac may be necessary to
remove residue from the paint finish.
You can get GM approved cleaning
products from your dealer. (See the
Index
under
Appearance Care.)
Your Pontiac has a “basecoatl
clearcoat
”
paint finish. The clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat.
Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoatklearcoat paint finish may
dull
the finish or leave swirl
marks.
._
262
Aluminum Wheels
(IF
so
EQUIPPED)
Your aluminum wheels have a protective
coating similar to the painted surface of
your Pontiac. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, chrome polish, or other
abrasive cleaners
on
them because you
could damage this coating. After rinsing
thoroughly, a wax may be applied.
If
you have aluminum wheels,
don’t use an automatic vehicle
wash that has hard silicon carbide
cleaning brushes. These brushes
can
take
off the protective coating.
White Sidewall Tires
Your Pontiac dealer has a
GM
White
Sidewall Tire Cleaner. You can use a
stiff brush with it.
Weatherstrips
These are places where glass or metal
meets rubber. Silicone grease there will
make them last longer, seal better, and
not squeak. Apply silicone grease with a
clean cloth at least every six months.
Sheet Metal Damage
If
your vehicle
is
damaged and requires
sheet metal repair or replacement, make
sure the body repair shop applies anti-
corrosion material to the parts repaired
or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Foreign Material
Calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, and other foreign
matter can damage your vehicle’s finish
if they remain
on
painted surfaces. Use
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces for these stains.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into a
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer or other
service outlets. Larger areas
of
finish
damage can be corrected in
your
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Undenbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect on
the underbody. If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur
on
the underbody parts such as fuel
lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with plain
water. Clean any areas where mud and
other debris can collect. Dirt packed in
closed areas of the frame should be
loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer or an underbody vehicle washing
system can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical fallout.
Airborne pollutants can
fall
upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.
This damage can take two
forms:
blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations,
and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surhce.
Although no defect in the paint
job
causes
this,
Pontiac will repair, at no
charge
to
the owner, the surfaces
of
new
vehicles damaged by this fdlout
condition within
12
months or
l2,OOO
miles
(20
0oO
km)
of purchase,
whichever comes first.
WIN)
Vehicle Identification Number
This is the legal identifier for your
Pontiac. It appears on a plate
in
the front
corner
of
the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look
through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN
also
appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts
labels and the certificates of title
and registration.
m..
264
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the
engine code for your
GM
engine. This
code will help you identify your engine,
specifications, and replacement parts in
this section.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label
on
your spare tire
cover. It’s very helpful if you ever need
to order parts. On this label is:
Your VIN.
Its model designation.
Paint information.
A list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed
from the vehicle.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Don’t add anything electrical to
your Pontiac unless you check with
your dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage wouldn’t
be covered
by
your warranty. Some
of it can just keep other things
from working as they should.
I
265
Service
&
Appearance Care
Fuses
&
Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination
of
fuses and circuit
breakers.
The main fuse panel is located to the
left
of
the steering wheel, under the
instrument panel. Pinch the release
levers to lower the fuse panel for ease
of
viewing, then pull the fuse panel toward
you to lock it down.
Snap
off
the cover to reveal the fuses.
You’ll find a fuse puller clipped
to
the
inside
of
the cover. Place the wide end
of
the fuse puller over
the
plastic end
of
the fuse. Squeeze the ends over the fuse
and pull it out.
Spare fuses are located in the slots
labeled “Spare” on the following chart.
Look at the silver-colored band inside
the fuse.
If
the band is broken or
melted, replace the fuse.
Be
sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one
of
the
correct size.
When finished, replace the cover and
pinch the release levers again to unlock
the panel. Press
it
back up into place.
..I
266
Left Side
Fuse
Panel
Fuses
&
Circuit Breakers
Position Rating
(AMP.)
7
8
9
10
ll
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
20
30
30
10
15
10
20
10
15
15
20
20
15
15
10
25
10
10
10
20
25
10
25
Circuitry
Start-up
Signal-SIR
Trunk Release/Back-Up Lights/Brake-Shift Interlock
(with Retained Accessory Power Option)
Breaker-Power Window/Sunroof
Breaker-Power Accessory
Heated Mirror/Compass
IgnitiodRetained Accessory Power/Illuminated EntryKeyless
Entry
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (Air Bag)
Cornering Lights/Turn Signals/(Back-Up Lights/Trunk
Release/Brake-Shift Interlock without Retained Accessory
Power Option)
Spare
Spare
Battery/Radio/Instrument
Panel/Oil Level
Electronic Level Control
Brake/Hazard Warning Flashers
Parking Lights
Courtesy Lights/Power Mirrors
CooIing Fan/Transaxle
Air Conditioning
Blank
Anti-Lock Brake System
Low Coolant/Light Monitor/Oil Level/HUD/Compass
Instrument Panel Lighting
Spare
Spare
IgnitiodRadio
WipedWasher
267
Service
&
A
.ante
Care
Righf
Side Fuse Panel Fuses
Additional fuses are located in the relay
(AMP.)
center,
on
the far right side, below the
Position Rating Circuitry
instrument panel.
%u
must remove the
sound insulator
on
the right side of the
passenger
foot
well to replace these
fuses.
Replacing these fuses is difficult. We
recommend that you see your dealer if
you need one replaced.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
15
15
20
15
20
10
10
A/C Programmer
Fog Lamps
Power Antenna/Door
Locks
Horns
Engine Relays and
Miscellaneous Engine
Content
Fuel Pump
Fuel Injectors
Engine Control Module,
PASS-KeyTM
Maxifuse/Relay Center
To
check the fuses
in
this underhood
fuse center, turn the two
knobs
%
turn
counterclockwise and loosen
the
metal
wing nut on the passenger side
of
the
cover. Then remove the cover. The
inside of the cover has a chart that
explains the features and controls
governed by each fuse and relay.
am.
268
Headlight Wiring
The headlight wiring
is
protected by a
circuit breaker in the light switch. An
electrical overload will cause the lights
to go on and off, or in some cases to
remain off. If this happens, have your
headlight system checked right away.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected
by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the
motor overheats due
to
heavy snow, etc.,
the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some
electrical problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect
the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem
is
fixed.
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Capacities
&
Specifications
Automatic Transaxle
AT
440-T4 (Overdrive)
When draining
or
replacing torque converter, more fluid
may
be needed.
Pan Removal and Replacement
........................
6% quarts
After Complete Overhaul
............................
1
1
quarts
I
Cooling System
.......................................
13
quarts
6.00
L
10.50
L
12.00
L
Refrigerant, Air Conditioning
...........................
See refrigerant charge label under hood.
Not all air conditioning refrzgerants are the same.
If
the air
conditioning system in your vehicle needs refiigerant, be sure
the proper refngerant is used.
If
you 're not sure, ask
your
Pontiac dealer.
Engine Crankcase
....................................
4
quarts
Fuel Tank
...........................................
18 gallons
When changing filter,
up
to
I
quart
(I
liter) more oil
may
be needed.
3.75
L
68.00
L
Power Steering
Pump
Only
.........................................
1
pint
0.50
L
Complete System
....................................
1
!h
pints
0.75
L
Tire Pressures, Sizes.
..................................
See
Tire-Loading Information label
on
driver's door.
Wheel Nut Torque
.....................................
100
pound-feet
(140
Nom)
NOTE:
All
capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure
to
fill to the appropriate level, as recommended
in
this manual.
270
I..
Engine Specifications
3800
fined
Port
Injection and
3800
Supercharged Engines
VIN
Engine Code (Tuned
Port)
.....
L
VIN Engine Code (Supercharged)
...
1
Type
..........................
V6
Displacement
...................
3.8
Liters
Compression Ratio
...............
8S:l (Code
L)
9.0:l (Code
1)
Firing Order
....................
1-6-5-4-3-2
Thermostat Temperature Specification 195"
F
(91
O
C)
Normal Maintenance Replacement PaHs
Air
Cleaner Element
...............
AC Type A-1096C
Engine Oil Filter
..................
AC Type PF-47
PCV
Valve
.......................
AC Type CV-892C
Remote
Lock
Control Battery
(2)
.....
2016
Spark Plugs
......................
AC Type 41-600
Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52
mm)
n
271
...
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Fluids
&
Lubricants
ITEM
Antifreeze Coolant.
....
(Ethylene Glycol Base)
Chassis Lubricant
..........
(Grease Gun Insert)
Delco Supreme
1
l@
Brake Fluid
...
DEXRONF
IIE
Automatic
Transmission Fluid
................
Engine Oil
.......................
GM Engine Oil Supplement
.........
Engine Oil
.......................
Windshield Washer Solvent.
.........
Power Steering Fluid (Normal)
.....
Power Steering Fluid (Cold Climate)
.
.
(System must be drained and refilled
with it.)
Silicone Grease
..................
Spray-A-Squeak Silicone Lubricant
...
Supercharger Oil
..................
(E.O.S.)
272
APPLICATION
GM
PART NUMBER
Year-round antifreeze for
............
1052753
coolant mixtures
General chassis lube, etc.
...........
Brakesystem
.....................
Automatic Transaxle
...............
1
052497
1
1
1
052535
234588
1
2345006
SIZE
1
gal.
(3.8
L)
14
oz.
(397
g)
16
oz.
(0.5
L)
32
oz.
(1
.O
L)
1
gal.
(3.8
L)
Engine lubrication
.................
See
Engine
OiE
in this section.
See your dealer for advice
...........
1052367 16
OZ.
(0.5
L)
Hood, trunk and door hinges
Windshield washer fluid
Power Steering System
.............
1050017
1052884
Power Steering System
.............
12345867
12345866
32
oz.
(1.0
L)
16
OZ.
(0.5
L)
32
oz.
(1
.O
L)
16
oz.
(0.5
L)
Weatherstrips.
....................
12345579
1
oz.
(28
g)
General purpose silicone lubricant
....
1052276
(aerosol)
4.5
oz.
(127
g)
1052277 12
oz.
(0.35
L)
Supercharger lubricant
.............
12345982 4
oz.
(113
g)
Replacement
Bulbs
OUTSIDE
LIGHTS BULB
Halogen Headlights
LowBeam
....................................
9006
HighBeam
....................................
9005
FrontPark
....................................
2057NA
FrontTurn
....................................
2057NA
Front Park/Turn
Front Side Marker
..............................
194
Taillights.
.....................................
194/2057
Rear Side Marker
...............................
194
Back-up Lights
..................................
1141
Center High-Mounted Stop Light
....................
1156
License Plate Light
...............................
194
Trunk
Light
.....................................
93
Underhood Light
.................................
561
Taillights
Stoplights
.....................................
2057
RearTu
.......................................
1156
FogLight
........................................
880
LAMP (Light) MONITOR MESSAGE
(OPTION)
HEAD LAMP
HIGH BEAM LAMP
PARK LAMP
TURN
SIGNAL LAMP
PARK LAMP
TAIL LAMP
BRAKE LAMP
TURN SIGNAL LAMP
TAIL LAMP
BACK UP LAMP
BRAKE
LAMP
TAIL LAMP
Service
&
Appearance
Care
Replacement
Bulbs
(CONT.:)
INSIDE
LIGHTS BULB
Courtesy Lights
.......................................
Front
Courtesy/Reading Lights
...........................
Rail CourtesylReading Lights
............................
Glove Compartment Light
.............................
Turn Signal Indicators
..................................
Visor Vanity Light
.....................................
Hush
Panel
(Lower
Floor
Lighting)
........................
AshTray
............................................
74
563
A3173B
194
74
7065
168
161
a..
274
KEEP ENGINE
OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL
AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
This part covers the maintenance
required
for
your Pontiac
.
Your
vehicle needs these services to
retain its safety. dependability and
emission control performance
.
Have you purchased the
GM
Protection Plan?
The Plan supplements your
new vehicle warranties
.
See your Pontiac dealer for details
.
Part
7
Section
Introduction
A Word About Maintenance
..........................
276
Your Vehicle and the Environment
..........................
276
How
This
Part
is Organized
...............................
277
Using Your Maintenance Schedules
.......................
278
Selecting the Right Schedule
..............................
278
A
.
Scheduled Maintenance Services
Schedule1
............................................
280
Schedule11
...........................................
282
Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance Services
..............
284
AtEachFuelFill
.......................................
287
B
.
Owner Checks
&
Services
At Least Once a Month
..................................
287
At Least Once a Year
....................................
288
C
.
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
...........................
290
D
.
Recommended Fluids
&
Lubricants
.........................
291
E
.
MaintenanceRecord
......................................
294
875
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
A
Word
About Maintenance
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in
good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how
you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a
few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the
time
in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do
errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
GM
vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent
checks and replacements than
you
will find in the schedules
in
this part.
So
please read this part and note how you drive.
If
you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in
good
condition,
see
your Pontiac dealer, the place many
GM
owners choose to have their maintenance
work
done. Your
dealer can be relied upon to use proper parts and practices.
bur Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are
important. Improper vehicle maintenance or the removal
of
important components can significantly affect the quality of
the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or even the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your
vehicle.
To
help protect our environment, and to help keep
your vehicle
in
good condition, please maintain your vehicle
properly.
mmm
276
How This
Part
is
Organized
The remainder
of
this part is divided into five sections:
Section
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services shows what to
have done and how often. Some
of
these services can be
complex,
so
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment,
you
should let your dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center do
these jobs.
1
CAUTION
Pe~%oxming
maintenance
work
on
a
vehicle
can
be
I
A
dangerous.
In
trying
to
do
some
jobs,
you
can
be
seriously injured.
Do
your own
maintenance
work
only
if you have
the
requited
know-how
and
the
proper
tools
and
equipment
for
the
job.
If’
you
have
any doubt,
have
a
qualified
technician
do
the
work.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle,
you will probably want to get the service information GM
publishes.
You
will find a list of publications and how to get
them in this manual. See the
Index
under
Sewice
Publications.
Section
B:
Owner Checks
&
Services tells you what should
be checked whenever you stop for fuel. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
Section
C
:
Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains
important inspections that your Pontiac dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center should
perform.
Section
D:
Recommended Fluids
&
Lubricants lists some
products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle
properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents,
should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it
done.
Section
E:
Maintenance Record provides a place for you to
record the maintenance performed on your vehicle.
Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure
to write it
down in this section. This will help you determine when
your next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a
good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be
needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
Maintenance Schedule
Section
A:
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using
Your
Maintenance Schedules
This section tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. Your
Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be
happy with it.
If
you go
to
your dealer for your service
needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits.
You
will find these limits on your vehicle’s Tire-Loading
Information label. See the
Index
under
Loading
Your
Ehicle.
limits.
Fuel.
are
driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving
use the recommended unleaded fuel. See the
Index
under
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule
to follow:
mm.
278
Schedule
I
Is
any one
of
these true for your vehicle?
Most trips are less than
4
miles
(6
km).
Most trips are less than
10
miles
(16
km)
when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as
in
door-to-
door delivery, or in stopand-go traffic).
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas.
You tow a trailer. (With some models, you shouldn’t ever
tow a trailer. See the
Index
under
Towing
a
Trailer.)
If
any one (or more) of these is true for your driving, follow
Schedule
I.
Schedule
I1
Follow Schedule
11
only
if none
of
the above conditions is
true.
27s
. .
Maintenance Schedule
Section
A:
Scheduled
Maintenance
Services
lcont.1
Schedule
I
281
Maintenance
Schedule
Section
A:
Scheduled
Maintenance
Services
[cant.]
Schedule I1
Follow Schedule
I1
ONLY
if none of
the driving conditions specified in
Schedule
I
apply.
ITEM
TO
BE
SERVICED
NO.
See
Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
following
Schedules
I
and
II.
WHEN
TO PERFORM
Miles (kilometers) or Months
(whichever occurs
first).
8
I
Spark
Plug
Replacement
*
Every
30,000
Miles
(50
000
krn).
~
10
I
Air
Cleaner Filter Replacement"
I
Every
30,000
Miles
(50
O00
km).
12
1
Supercharger Oil Check
(3.8L
Code
1
engine
only)
1
Every
30,~
Miles
(50
OOO
km)
or
36
Months.
I
The services
shown
in
this schedule up to
45,000
miles
(75
000
km)
are
to
be
performed after
45,000
miles at the same intervals.
MILES
(000)
KILOMETERS
(000)
7.5 37.5
I
45
15
1
22.5
I
30
12.5
I
25
62.5
I
75
37.5
I
50
0
0
0
*An Emission Control Service.
A
The
US.
Environmental Protection Agency
has determined that the failure to perjorm this
maintenance item
will
not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion
of
vehicle use&l life. General
Motors, however, urges that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded in Section
E:
Maintenance Record.
283
Maintenance
Schedule
Section
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services
[cant.]
Explanation
of
Scheduled Maintenance Services
Below are explanations of the services listed in Schedule
I
and Schedule
II.
ITEM
NO.
SERVICE
1
2
Engine
Oil
and Filter Change-Always use
SG
Energy Conserving
II
oils of proper viscosity. The
“SG” designation may be shown alone or in
combination with others, such as “SG/CC,”
“SG/CD” or
“SF,
SG,
CC,” etc.
To
determine the
preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine (e.g.,
SAE
5W-30
or SAE
10W-30),
see the
Index
under
Engine
Oil.
Chassis Lubrication-Lubricate the transaxle shift
linkage, parking brake cable guides, underbody
contact points and linkage. Lubricate the front and
rear suspension and steering linkage.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Section D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs
done before you or anyone else drives
the
vehicle.
ITEM
NO.
SERVICE
3
4
Throttle Body Mounting Bolt Torque-Check
the torque
of
the mounting bolts and/or nuts.
Tire
and
Wheel Rotation and Inspection-For
proper wear and maximum tire life, rotate your
tires following the instructions in this manual. See
the
Index
under
fires,
Inspection
&
Rotation.
Check the tires for uneven wear or damage.
If
you
see irregular or premature wear, check the wheel
alignment. Check for damaged wheels also.
*An Emission Control Service.
a
The
US.
Environmental Protection Agency has determined that the failure
to
pe$orm this maintenance item
will
not
nullifL
the emission warranty
or
limit recall liability prior to the completion
of
vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that
all
recommended maintenance sewices be
pe$ormed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded in Section
E:
Maintenance Record.
m..
284
ITEM
NO.
SERVICE
5
Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection*-
Inspect the belt for cracks, fraying, wear and
proper tension. Replace as needed.
6
Cooling System Service*-Drain, flush and refill
the
system with new or approved recycled coolant
conforming
to
GM
Specification 1825M. Keep
coolant at the proper mixture as specified. See the
Index
under
Coolant.
This provides proper freeze
protection, corrosion inhibitor level and engine
operating temperature.
Inspect hoses and replace if they are cracked,
swollen or deteriorated. Tighten screw-type hose
clamps. Clean the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser. Wash the pressure cap and
neck.
To
help ensure proper operation, we recommend a
pressure test
of
both the cooling system and the
pressure cap.
ITEM
NO.
SERVICE
7
Transaxle Service-Change both the fluid and
filter every
15,000
miles
(25
000
km)
if the vehicle
is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside tem-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police car or delivery
If you
do
not use your vehicle under any
of
these .conditions, change both the fluid and filter
every
100,000
miles
(160
000
km).
with the proper type. See the
Index
under
Replacement Parts.
perature regularly reaches
90°F
(32OC) or higher.
service.
8
Spark Plug Replacement*-Replace spark plugs
285
Maintenance
Schedule
Section
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services
[cant.]
ITEM
NO.
SERVICE
9
Spark Plug Wire Inspection* *-Inspect for
burns, cracks or other damage. Check the boot fit
at the coils and at the spark plugs. Replace wires as
needed.
10
Air
Cleaner Filter Replacement*-Replace every
30,000
miles
(50
OOO
krn)
or more often under
dusty conditions. Ask your dealer for the proper
replacement intervals for your driving conditions.
*An Emission
Control
Service.
ITEM
NO.
SERVICE
11
Fuel 'hnk, Cap and Lines Inspection**-
Inspect fuel
tank,
cap and lines (including fuel rails
and injection assembly) for damage or leaks.
Inspect fuel cap gasket for an even filler neck
imprint or any damage. Replace parts as needed.
Periodic replacement
of
the fuel filter is not
required.
12
Supercharger Oil Check-Check oil every
30,000
miles
(50
000
km)
or
36
months. Add the proper
synthetic oil. See the
Ida
under
Recommended
Fluids
&
Lubricants.
b
Re
US.
Environmental Protection Agency has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nulliJjl the emission warranty
or
limit recall liability prior
to
the completion
of
vehicle us@l lije. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded in Section
E:
Maintenance Record.
...
286
Section
B:
Owner
Checks
&
Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which should
be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the
safety, dependability and emission control performance of
your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in
Section
D.
At Each
Fuel Fill
(It is important
for
you
or
a service station attendant to
perform
these underhood checks at each fuel fill.)
I
I
i
CHECK WHAT TO
DO
OR
SERVICE
Engine Oil Level
Engine Coolant Level
Check
the
engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See the
Index
under
Engine
Oil
for
Check
the
windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid
Windshield Washer
Check the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery
tank
and add the proper coolant
mix
if
Fluid Level
if
necessary. See the
Index
under
Windshield Washer Fluid
for further details.
further details.
necessary. See the
Index
under
Coolant
for further details.
At least Once a Month
CHECK
OR
SERVICE WHAT TO
DO
Tire Inflation Check tire inflation. Make sure they are inflated to the pressures specified on the Tire-Loading
Information label located on the rear edge
of
the driver’s door. See the
Index
under
Tires
for
further details.
287
I
Maintenance
Schedule
Section
B:
Owner
Checks
&
Services
[cant.]
At
Least
Once
a
Year
CHECK
OR
SERVICE
I
WHAT TO
DO
Key Lock Cylinders
I
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Section
D.
Body Lubrication Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the
hood, rear compartment, glove box door, console
doors
and any folding seat hardware. Section
D
tells you what to use.
~ ~~~~~ ~~
Steering Column
Lock
I..
288
1.
Before
you
start,
be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2.
Firmly apply both the parking brake (see the
Index
under
Parking
Brake
if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE:
Do
not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn
off the engine immediately if
it
starts.
3.
Try
to
start
the engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in
P
(Park) or
N
(Neutral).
If
the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to
turn
the key to
Lock
in each shift lever
position.
The key should
turn
to
Lock
only when the shift lever is
in
P
(Park).
The key should come out only in
Lock.
CHECK
OR SERVICE
I
WHAT
TO
DO
Interlock (BTSI)
I
Parking Brake and
Automatic Transaxle
P
(Park) Mechanism
Check
Underbody Flushing
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly.
If
it does, you or others
b
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enougl-
-
>om around the vehicle.
It
shoulc -e parked
on
a
level surface.
2.
Firmly apply
the
parking brake (see the
Index
under
Parking Brake
if
necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3.
With the engine off, turn the
key
to the
Run
position, but don’t start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake,
try
to move the shift lever out of
P
(Park) with normal effort. If
the shift lever moves
out
of
P
(Park), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be
L
injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front
of
your vehicle
in
case
it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
PalR
ull
a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your
foot
on
the
regular
brake, set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake: With the engine running and transaxle in
N
(Neutral), slowly
remove
foot
pressure from the regular brake pedal.
Do
this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
To check the
P
(Park) mechanism’s holding ability: Shift to
P
(Park). Then release all brakes.
At
least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.
289
Maintenance
Schedule
Section
C:
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall).
You should let your GM dealer’s service department
or
other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary
repairs are completed at once.
INSPECTION
OR SERVICE
Steering, Suspension
and Front-Wheel-Drive
Axle Boot and Seal
Inspection
Exhaust System
Inspection
Throttle Linkage
Inspection
Brake System
Inspection
I
-
WHAT SHOULD
BE
DONE
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear,
or
lack
of
lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper
hookup, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for
damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals
if
necessary.
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system.
Look
for broken,
damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections, or
other conditions which could cause a heat build-up
in
the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes
into the vehicle. See
the
Index
under
Engine Exhaust.
Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts.
Replace parts as needed.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hookup, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Also
inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
You
may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result
in
frequent braking.
NOTE:
A low brake fluid level can indicate
worn
disc brake pads which may need to be
serviced. Also, if the brake system warning light
stays
on or comes on, something may be wrong
with the brake system. See the
Index
under
Brake System Warning Light.
If your anti-lock brake
system warning light stays
on
or comes on, something may be wrong
with
the anti-lock brake
system. See the
Index
under
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light.
Section
I:
Recommended Fluids
&
Lubricants
NOTE:
Fluids and lubricants identified
below
by
name,
part number or specification may be obtained from your
GM
dealer.
I
Engine Oil
Hydraulic Brake
System
Parking Brake Guides
t
Power Steering System
Automatic Transaxle
Supercharger
FWID/WBRICANT
GM Goodwrench Motor Oil or equivalent for API service SG Energy Conserving
II
oils
of
the
proper viscosity. The “SG” designation may be shown alone or in combination with others, such
as “SG/CC,” “SG/CD,” or “SF, SG, CC,” etc.
To
determine the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see the
Index
under
Engine
Oil.
A 50/50 mixture of water (preferably distilled) and good quality ethylene glycol base antifreeze
(GM
Part
No. 1052753 or equivalent) conforming to GM Specification 1825M or approved
recycled coolant conforming to GM Specification 1825M.
Delco Supreme
ll@
Brake Fluid (GM
Part
No.
1052535) or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Chassis lubricant meeting requirements
of
NLGI Grade
2,
Category LB or GC-LB (GM
Part
No.
1052497 or equivalent).
GM Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part
No. 1052884) or equivalent.
DEXRON@-IIE Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM
Part
No.
12345881).
~~~ ~~
Supercharger
Oil
(GM
Part
No.
12345982).
~~~ ~~
291
Maintenance
Schedule
Section
I:
Recommended
Fluids
&
Lubricants
lcont.1
USAGE
FLUD/UIBRICANT
Key Lock Cylinders Lubricate with Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM
Part
No. l2345l20), synthetic SAE
5W-30
engine
I
oil or silicone lubricant (GM
Part
No. 1052276 or 1052277).
I
Automatic Transaxle
Shift Linkage Engine oil.
Floor Shift Linkage
Chassis lubricant meeting requirements
of
NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB
Chassis Lubrication
Engine oil.
(GM
Part
No.
1052497
or
equivalent).
Windshield Washer
Solvent GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent (GM
Part
No. 1051515) or equivalent.
USAGE
Hood Latch Assembly
a. Pivots and Spring
b. Release
Pawl
Anchor
Hood
and Door Hinges,
Fuel Door Hinge, Rear
Compartment Lid
Hinges
Weatherstrips
FLUID/LUBRICANT
a. Engine oil.
b. Chassis lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade
2,
Category LB or GC-LB
(GM
Part
No. 1052497 or equivalent).
Engine oil or Lubriplate Lubricant
(GM
Part
No.
1050109).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579
or
equivalent).
See the
Index
under
Replacement
Parts
for recommended replacement filters, valves and spark plugs.
293
Maintenance Schedule
Section
E:
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service in the
columns indicated. When completing the Maintenance
Performed column, insert the numbers from the Schedule
I
or Schedule
I1
maintenance charts which correspond to the
maintenance performed. Also,
you
should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is
a
convenient place to store them.
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance
Schedule
Section
E:
Maintenance Record
[cant.]
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Here you will find out how to
contact Pontiac
if
you need
assistance. This part also tells you
how
to obtain service publications
and how
to
report any safety defects.
Part
8
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
....................................
.298
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired.
................
.299
BBB
MediatiodArbitration Program
.................................
.300
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................................
.302
Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program
................................
.303
Service Publications
.............................................
.304
c
297
...
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and Pontiac.
Normally, any concern with the sales
transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s
Sales or Service Departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should
be taken:
STEP
ONE:
Discuss your concern
with
a member of dealership management.
Complaints can often be quickly
resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the Sales,
Service, or Parts Manager, contact the
owner of the dealership or the General
Manager.
STEP TWO:
If
after contacting a
member of Dealership Management,
it
appears your concern cannot be resolved
by the dealership without further help,
contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-PM CARES. In
Canada, contact
GM
of Canada
Customer Assistance Centre in Oshawa
by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In
Puerto Rico or
U.S.
Virgin Islands, call
1-809-763-1315. In all other overseas
locations, contact GM International
Export Sales in Canada by calling
1-416-644-4112.
For prompt assistance, please have the
following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
Your name, address, telephone
number
Vehicle Identification Number (This is
available from the vehicle registration
or title, or the plate attached to the left
top of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present
Nature of concern
mileage
...
298
We encourage you to call the toll free
number listed previously in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention.
However, if
you
wish to write Pontiac,
write to:
United States
Pontiac Division
Customer Assistance Center
One Pontiac Plaza
Pontiac,
MI
48340
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre
1908 Colonel
Sam
Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
A
listing of all Pontiac Zone Offices
and
offices outside the
U.S.
which can assist
you can also be found in the warranty
booklet.
When contacting Pontiac, please
remember that your concern will likely
be resolved in the dealership, using the
dealership’s facilities, equipment and
personnel. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One first if you have a
concern.
Customer Assistance Fior the
Hearing or Speech Impaired
0
To assist owners who have hearing
difficulties, Pontiac has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) can communicate with Pontiac by
dialing: 1-800-TDD-PONT. (TDD users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
299
r
Customer Assistance Information
GM
Participation In Better
Business Bureau
Mediationhlrbitration Program*
Our experience has shown that the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this part has been
very successful
in
achieving customer
satisfaction. However, if
you
have not
been substantially satisfied, Pontiac
wants you to be aware of
GM’s
voluntary participation in a no-charge
mediatiodarbitration program called
BBB AUTO LINE. This program is
administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus through local Better
Business Bureaus.
It
can resolve
individual disputes involving vehicle
repairs and the interpretation of your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
300
We prefer that you
not
resort
to
BBB
AUTO LINE until after a final decision
is made under the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure. However, you may
file
a
claim at any time by contacting your
local Better Business Bureau (BBB) at
the following toll-free number:
1-800-955-5100.
For further information
about filing a claim, you may also write
to:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council
of
Better Business Bureaus
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite
800
Arlington, VA 22203
In order to file a claim, you
will
have to
provide your name and address, the
vehicle identification number (VIN) of
your vehicle, and a statement
of
the
nature of your complaint. BBB staff may
try
to help resolve your dispute through
mediation.
If
mediation is not
successful, or
if
you do not wish to
participate in mediation, eligible
customers may present their case to an
impartial third-party arbitrator at an
informal hearing. The arbitrator will
render a decision in your case, which
you may accept or reject. If you accept
a
valid arbitrator decision,
GM
will
be
bound by that decision. The entire
dispute settlement process should
ordinarily take about
40
days from the
time you file your complaint to the time
a decision is rendered (or
47
days
if
you
did not first contact your dealer or
Pontiac)
.
We encourage you to use this program
before or instead of resorting to the
courts. We believe
it
offers advantages
over courts
in
most jurisdictions because
it is fast, free of charge, and informal
(lawyers are not usually present,
although you may retain one at your
expense if you choose). Arbitrators
make decisions based on
the
principles
of fairness and equity, and are not
required to duplicate the functions of
courts by strictly applying state or
federal law. If you wish to go to court,
however, we do not require that you first
file
a claim with
BBB
AUTO LINE**
unless state law provides otherwise.
Whatever your preference may be,
remember that if
you
are unhappy with
the results
of
BBB
AUTO LINE, you
can still
go
to
court because an
arbitrator’s decision is binding
on
GM
but not on you, unless you accept it.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle
agehileage and other factors. For
further information concerning the
program, call the
BBB
at
1-800-955-5100. You may also call the
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center.
*
This program may not be available in
all states, depending
on
state law.
Canadian owners refer
to
your
warranty booklet. General Motors
reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
**
Some states may require that you$le
a claim with
BBB
AUTO
LINE
before
resorting to state-operated
procedures (including court).
301
...
Customer Assistance Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If
NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists
in
a
group
of
vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To
contact NHTSA,
you
may either call
the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA
U.S.
Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
302
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If
you live
in
Canada, and
you
believe
that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should immediately notify Transport
Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may
write to:
Transport Canada
Box
8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In
addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada)
in
a situation like
this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at
1-8OO-PM-CARES,
or
write:
Pontiac Division
Customer Assistance Center
One Pontiac Plaza
Pontiac,
MI
48340
In
Canada, please call us at
1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Pontiac
Roadside
Assistance Program
Security While Bu
Travel
1-800-ROADSIDE
-
1-800-762-3743
As
the proud owner of a new Pontiac
vehicle, you are automatically enrolled
in
the Pontiac Roadside Assistance
Program?’ This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of
mind as you drive in the city or travel
the open road.
Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll-free
number is staffed by a team of technically
trained advisors, who are available
24
hours a day, 365 days a year.
We
take
anxiety
out
of uncertain
situations by providing minor repair
information over the phone or making
arrangements to tow your vehicle to the
nearest Pontiac dealer.
We will provide the following services
for 3 years/36,000 miles, at
no
expense
to you:
Vehicle out of fuel
Keys locked in vehicle
Tow to nearest dealer for warranty
Change a flat tire
Jump starts
We have quick, easy access to telephone
numbers of the following services
depending on your needs:
Hotels
Glass replacement
Rental vehicles or taxis
Police, fire department
or
hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures
are covered under Pontiac’s
comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our
advisors will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
Pontiac reserves the right to limit
services or reimbursement to
an
owner
or driver when in Pontiac’s judgement
the claims become obsessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
*In Canada, call
1-8OO-268-68OO
for
details
on
Roadside Assistance.
303
Customer
Assistance
Information
w
Pontiac Roadside
Assistance Program
(em.)
For prompt and efficient assistance
when calling, please provide the
following information to the advisor:
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle license plate number
While we hope that you never have the
occasion
to
use our service,
it
is added
security while travelling for you and
your family. Remember, we’re only a
phone call away. Pontiac Roadside
Assistance-1-800-ROADSIDE
-
or
1-800-762-3743.
Service Publications
Information on how
to
obtain Product
Service Publications and Indexes as
described below
is
applicable
only
in
the
fifty
US. states (and the District of
Columbia) and only for cars and light
trucks with GVWR less than 10,000
pounds
(4536
kg).
In Canada, information pertaining to
Product Service Bulletins and Indexes
can be obtained by writing to:
General Motors
of
Canada Limited
Service Publications Department
1908
Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L1H
8P7
Pontiac regularly sends its dealers useful
service bulletins about Pontiac products.
Pontiac monitors product performance
in the field. We then prepare bulletins
for servicing our products better. Now,
you can get these bulletins too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some
pertain to the proper use and care of
your vehicle. Some describe costly
repairs. Others describe inexpensive
repairs which, if done on time
with
the
latest parts, may avoid future costly
repairs. Some bulletins tell a technician
how to repair a new or unexpected
condition. Others describe a quicker
way to
fix
your vehicle. They can help a
technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions
affecting a small number of cars or
trucks. Your Pontiac dealer or a
qualified technician may have to
determine if
a
specific bulletin applies to
your vehicle.
Individual
PSP’s
If you don’t want to buy all the PSP’s
issued by Pontiac for all models
in
the
model year, you can buy individual
PSP’s, such as those which may pertain
to a particular model.
To
do this,
you
will first need
to
see our index
of
PSP’s.
It
provides a variety of information.
Here’s what you’ll find in the index and
how you can get one:
What You’ll Find in the Index
A
list
of
all PSP’s published by
Pontiac in a model year
(1990
or
later). PSP’s covering all models of
Pontiac vehicles are listed in the same
index.
Ordering information
so
you can buy
the specific PSP’s you may want.
Price information
for
the PSP’s you
may want to buy.
Customer Assistance Information
How
You
Can Get an Index
Indexes are published periodically. Most
of the PSP’s which could potentially
apply to the most recent Pontiac models
will be listed in the most recent
publication for that model year. This
means you may want
to
wait until the
end of the model year before ordering
an index, if you are interested in buying
PSP’s pertaining to a current model year
car or truck.
Some PSP’s pertaining to a particular
model year vehicle may be published
in
later years, and these would be listed in
the later year’s index. When you order
an index for a model year that is not
over yet, we’ll send you the most
recently published issue. Check the
order form for indexes for earlier model
years.
Cut out the order form, fill it out, and
mail it
in.
We will then see to it that an
index is mailed to you. There is no
charge for indexes for the 1990-1993
model years.
Toll-Free Telephone Number
If you want an additional order form
for
an index, just call toll-free and we’ll be
happy to send you one. Automated
recording equipment will take your
name and mailing address. The number
to call
is
1-800-551-4123.
A
Very Important Reminder
These PSP’s are meant for technicians.
They are not meant for the “do-it-
yourselferl’ Technicians have the
equipment, tools, safety instructions,
and know-how to do a job quickly and
safely.
Pontiac Service Publications
You
can get these by using the following
order form.
Pontiac Division service manuals are
intended for use by professional,
qualified technicians. Attempting repairs
or service without the appropriate
training, tools, and equipment could
cause injury to you or others and
damage to your vehicle that may cause it
not to operate properly.
1993
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of
your vehicle
can
be
purchased
by
filling out the Service Publications Order Form
in
this book and mailing it with your check, money order or credit card information to
H8h,
Incorporated (address listed below).
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR
1993
PONTIAC BONNEVILLE
PRODUCT SERVICE PUBLICATIONS
Product Service Publications (PSP’s), are bulletins, letters and articles
published for trained dealer service personnel. See Service Publica-
tions listed previously in this section.
A
cumulative index is published quarterly during the current model
year. The indexes list all PSP’s published by Pontiac in the model year.
PSP Index
Year Form Number Price
1993
PSPI-93-P .
..............
Free
1992 PSPI-92-P.
........................
Free
1991
PSPI-91-P ..
............................
Free
1990 PSPI-90-P.
.............................
Free
NOTE:
Form Numbers for individual Product Service Publications may
be found in the PSP Index. Prices are $4.00 for the first PSP and
$2.00
for each additional PSP on the same order.
PSP Bound Bulletin Book (Complete Year Bulletins)
Year Description Form Number Price
1991
All
PSP’S
....................
S-91-PSP-4 15.00
1990
All
PSP’S
....................
S-90-PSP-4 15.00
For subscription information call Helm, Incorporated.
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis, repair and overhaul information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steer-
ing, body, etc.
Model Form Number Price
1993 Pontiac Bonneville
.............
S-9310-H $43.00
*Please specify special body or engine types on order form. Write
information in the Form Number column. For example: Turbo,
Convertible.
OWNER’S
INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to pro-
vide basic operational information about the vehicle. The Owner’s
Manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
1993 Pontiac Bonneville Owner’s Manual
In Portfolio:
lnClUd8S
htffolio, Owner‘s Manualand Warranty Booklet.
1993 Pontiac Bonneville
SE
In-Portfolio
. .
,10202134 $15.00
1993 Pontiac Bonneville
SSEl
In-Portfolio .lo215984 $15.00
Without Portfolio:
lncludes Owner’s Manual.
1993 Pontiac Bonneville Without Portfolio .lo202135 $11.00
CURRENT
&
PAST
MODEL
ORDER
FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past model Pontiac
vehicles.
To
request an order form, please specify year and model
name
of
vehicle.
Address all inquiries to:
HELM, INCORPORATED
PO.
Box 07130
Detroit,
MI
48207
Credit Card Orders ONLV: 1-800-782-4356
For information and inqulries call: (313) 883-1430
c
307
’ ’
Notes
PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS
ORDER
FORM
NOTE:
Please complete
form
below (Print
or
Type)
and
MAIL
TO:
c--
Post
Office
Box
07130,
Detroit,
Michigan
482(
L
I
ORDER
TOLL
FREE
I
*Minimum Credit Card Order
$10.00
For
Card
"Older
Orders
Only)
If further information
is
needed, write Helm
or
call
(:
#)
883-1430.
1-800-782-4356
(Monda -Frida
8130
A.M.-~:oo
P.M.
EST)
ORDER
INFORMATION NOT AVAILABLE THROUGH THE TOLL FREE
NUMBER.
PUBLICATION
FORM
NUMBER' ITEM DESCRIPTION VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
I
I
I
(CUSTOMER
NAME) (ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO
P.0
BOX NUMBERS)
(STATE)
(ZIP CODE) address isdinerent from your
shipping address shown.
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. CODE
fCUSTOMER
SIGNATURE)
Index
ABS Warning Light
............
106
Accessory Outlet
................
93
Adding
Brake Fluid
..................
243
Electrical Equipment
..
.93, 126. 265
Engine Coolant
...............
238
Engine Oil
..................
231
Power Steering Fluid
..........
242
l
Sound Equipment
.............
126
Transaxle Fluid
..............
238
Windshield Washer Fluid
.......
243
Adjustable Support Seat
...........
11
AirBag
.......................
22
Air Cleaner Filter
..........
.233. 271
Air Conditioner
...........
.120. 123
Air Conditioner Refrigerant
.......
270
Air Inflator System
.............
209
Alcohol, Driving Under the Influence
of
..........................
151
Alcohol in Gasoline
.............
223
Aluminum Wheels
Cleaning
....................
262
Removing
...................
212
Fixed
.......................
142
Power
......................
142
Antenna
Antifreeze
.
.205.206.239.240.270. 272
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
....
155
Warning Light
................
106
Appearance Care
...............
257
Armrest. Storage
................
90
Ashtrays
&
Lighter
...........
.91. 92
Audio Systems
.................
126
AM/FM Stereo Radio
..........
128
AM/FM Stereo Radio with
Cassette Player
.............
129
AM/FM Stereo with Cassette
Player and Graphic Equalizer
.
.
131
AM/FM Stereo with Compact
Disc Player
................
134
Care
of
Audio Systems
.........
141
CD Player Anti-Theft Feature
....
137
Gain Control
.................
140
Hearing Damage Warning
......
126
Radio Reception.
For the Best
................
140
Setting the Clock
.............
127
Steering Wheel Controls
........
139
Adding Fluid
................
238
Checking Fluid
...............
236
Shifting
......................
61
Automatic Transaxle
Battery
......................
245
Jump Starting
................
193
Battery Warning Light
...........
104
Blizzard
......................
181
Block Heater. Engine
.............
60
“Blowout.” Tire
................
208
Boost Gage
....................
111
Brakes
Adjustment
..................
159
Anti-Lock
...................
155
Drums
......................
159
Fluid
..................
.243. 272
Master Cylinder
..............
243
Parking
......................
67
Pedal Travel
.................
159
Replacement
.................
245
Warning Light
................
105
Wear Indicators-Front Brakes
...
158
Standard Brakes
..............
105
Anti-Lock Brake System
........
106
Braking
.......................
154
Braking
in
Emergencies
..........
159
Braking Technique
..............
154
“Break-In,
”
New Vehicle
..........
57
Buckling Up (see
Safety
Belts)
Brake System Warning Light
311
Index
..I
Bulb Replacement
Headlight
..............
.246. 273
Taillight
...............
.247. 273
Bulbs. Replacement
.............
273
Capacities
&
Specifications
......
270
Carbon Monoxide
in Exhaust
............
.71. 72.
181
Cassette Tape Player
(see
Audio
Systems)
Center Front Lap Belt
(see
Safety
Belts)
Center Passenger Position
.........
30
Chains. Tire
..............
.218. 256
Changing a Flat Tire
.............
210
Check Gages Warning Light
.......
108
Checking
Brake Fluid
..................
243
Engine Coolant
..........
.205,
239
Engine
Oil
Level
..............
231
Power Steering Fluid
..........
242
Transaxle Fluid
..............
236
Restraint Systems
..............
44
Checking
Things
Under the Hood
...
227
312
Check Oil Level Warning Light
...
103
Child Restraints
.................
34
Children and Safety Belts
.....
.33.
42
Cigarette Lighter
................
92
Circuit Breakers
&
Fuses
........
266
City Driving
...................
171
Cleaner. Air
..............
.233, 271
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels
............
262
Cassette Player
...............
141
Fabric
..................
258. 259
Finish Care
.................
262
Glass
.......................
2.61
Head-Up Display
.............
118
Inside
of
Your Pontiac
.........
258
Outside
of
Your Pontiac
........
261
Power Antenna
..............
-142
Safety Belts
.................
260
Special Problems
.............
259
Underbody Maintenance
.......
264
Vinyl or Leather
.............
260
Warnings
......
.257. 258. 260. 262
Weatherstrips
................
262
White Sidewall Tires
..........
262
Windshield and Wiper Blades
...
261
Chemical Paint Spotting
.........
264 Climate Control
Electronic
...................
123
Standard
....................
120
Clock. Setting the
..............
127
Clusters. Instrument Panel
........
96
Comfort Controls
Electronic Climate Control
.....
123
Standard Climate Control
......
120
Compact Spare Tire
.............
217
Compass
......................
113
Control of a Vehicle
.............
153
Convenience Net
................
56
Convex Outside Mirror
...........
87
Coolant
Checking
&
Function Monitor
.............
111
“Low” Warning Light
.........
101
Proper Mixture to Use
.........
239
Safety Warnings About
..
.202. 204.
205. 206. 228. 240. 241
Temperature Gage
............
109
Temperature Warning Light
.....
101
Cruise Control
..................
77
Curves. Driving on
.............
160
Customer Assistance Information
. .
297
Adding
......
.205.
206. 239. 240
Daytime Running Lights
.........
83
Dead Battery: What to Do
........
193
Defects. Safety
Defensive Driving
..............
150
Defogger. Rear Window
.....
.l22. 124
Defogging Windows
........
.l21. 124
Defrosting
................
.l21.
124
Delco LOC
II
..................
137
DoorLocks
....................
47
Downshifting
..........
.65. 176. 189
Driver Information Center
.........
111
Driver Fosition
..................
18
Driving
At Night
....................
165
City
........................
171
Controlling a Skid
.............
164
Defensively
..................
150
Drunken
....................
151
Freeway
....................
172
Hill and Mountain
............
176
In a Foreign Country
..........
225
In Fog. Mist and Haze
.........
170
In the
Rain
..................
168
Long Distance
................
174
Loss of Control
...............
164
(See
Safety Defects. Reporting)
Door Cup Holder
...............
90
On Curves
...................
160
Passing
.....................
163
Through Deep Standing Water
....
60
Winter Driving
...............
179
Drunken Driving
...............
151
Electrical Equipment.
Adding
..............
.93.126. 265
Electronic Climate Control
.......
123
Emergencies. Braking
...........
159
Emergencies on the Road
.........
191
Emergencies. Steering in
.........
161
Emergency Starting
.............
193
Emergency Towing
..............
197
Engine Block Heater
........
.60. 233
Engine Coolant
................
238
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
. .
109
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
................
101
Engine Exhaust
.............
.71. 181
Engine Identification
............
265
Engine
Oil
....................
231
Additives
..................
-232
Electronic Compass
.............
113
Checking
&
Adding
...........
231
Check Level Light
............
103
Disposing of Used Oil
.........
233
Energy Conserving
............
232
Oil
Warning Light
.............
102
Pressure Gage
................
110
Warning. Used
...............
233
When to Change
..............
233
Engine Overheating
.............
202
Engine Specifications
............
271
Engine, Starting Your
.............
58
Ethanol in Gasoline
.............
223
Exhaust
Dangerous Gas
in
.......
.71.72, 181
Parking with the
Engine Running
..........
.70. 72
Expectant Mothers. Use of
Safety Belts
..................
29
Express Open Sunroof
............
89
Expressway Driving
.............
172
Extender, Safety Belt
.............
43
Exterior Appearance
(see
Appearance Care)
Fabric Cleaning
Fan
Warnings
.........
.194. 195, 204
Filling Your Tank
...............
226
313
(see
Appearance Care)
Index
Filter
Air Cleaner
.............
.233. 271
Fuel
........................
271
Oil
....................
.233. 271
Finish Damage
.................
263
Flashers. Hazard Warning
........
192
Flat Tire
......................
208
Flooded Engine
.................
59
Fluid
Flow-Through Ventilation
........
125
Brake
.................
.243. 272
Capacities
...................
270
Power Steering
......
.242. 270. 272
Transaxle
..........
.238. 270. 272
Windshield Washer
.
76. 242. 272. 292
Fluids
&
Lubricants
.............
272
Fog. Driving in
.................
170
Fog Lights
................
.85.
247
Foreign Material
...............
263
Foreign Operation
..............
225
Freeway Driving
................
172
French Language Manual
..........
2
Fuel
.....................
222. 223
Alcohol in Fuel
..............
223
Capacity
....................
224
Door Lock
..................
225
Door Release. Manual
.........
227
Door Release. Remote
.........
225
Exhaust Warnings
......
.71. 72. 181
Filling Your Tank
.............
226
Fuels with Alcohol
............
223
Gage
.......................
109
In Foreign Countries
..........
225
Low. Warning
................
109
Requirements
...........
.222. 223
Function Monitor
...............
1ll
FusePanel
....................
267
Fuses
&
Circuit Breakers
.........
266
Gages
.......................
108
Fuel
........................
109
Oil Pressure
..................
110
Voltmeter
....................
110
Gasoline
......................
222
Gas Station Information
..........
320
Gear Positions
Gearshift Lever
Coolant Temperature
..........
109
Gasoline Tank. Filling Your
.......
226
(see
Shifting the Transaxle)
(see
Shifting the Transaxle)
Glove
Box
.....................
56
Graphic Equalizer (see
Audio Systems)
Halogen Bulb Replacement
.
.246. 273
Hazard Warning Flashers
.........
192
Headlight
&
Taillight. Removing
and Replacing
...........
.246. 247
Headlight Washers
...............
77
Head-Up Display
...............
116
Headlights
.....................
81
High-Low Beam Changer
.......
83
Instrument Panel Intensity
Control
....................
84
Lamp Monitor
................
112
“On” Reminder
...............
82
Replacement Bulb
.............
273
Washers
.....................
77
Wiring
.....................
269
Head Restraints
.................
13
Heater (see
Comfort
Controls)
Heater, Engine Block
.............
60
High Beams
...............
.83. 167
“Highway Hypnosis”
............
175
Hill and Mountain Roads
.........
176
Hills, Parking on
...........
.177. 189
Hood Release
..................
227
Safety Warning
..
.194. 195.
’
204. 228
Warning. Overheated Engine
...
.196.
204.205.206.228.240. 241
Horn
.........................
72
Hot Engine. Safety Warnings
....
.196.
204.205.206.228.240. 241
How the Anti-Lock Brake
System Works
...............
-156
Hydroplaning
..................
169
Identification Number. Vehicle
....
264
If You’re Stuck in Sand. Mud.
Ignition
Idling Your Engine
...........
.70. 72
Ice. or Snow
.................
218
Key
.........................
46
Positions
.....................
57
Illuminated Entry
................
55
Inflation. Tires
................
250
Indicator Lights (see
Warning Lights)
Infant Restraint (see
Child Restraints)
Inside Rearview Mirror
..........
86
Instrument Panel
................
94
Instrument Panel Clusters
.........
96
Instrument Panel Warning Lights
...
99
Intensity Control
................
84
....................
J
ack. Tire 211
Jump Starting
..................
193
Keyless Entry. Remote
...........
49
Keys
..........................
46
Lamp Monitor
.................
112
Lane Change Indicator
............
72
Lap-Shoulder Safety Belt
..........
19
Front
.......................
30
Rear
........................
31
Use by Children
...............
33
Light Controls
..................
81
Lighters
.......................
92
Air Bag System
...............
24
Daytime Running Lights
.........
83
Fog Lights
...................
85
Headlights
............
.81, 83, 246
“On” Reminder
...............
82
Lights
Parking
......................
81
Reading
.....................
85
Removing
&
Replacing
Bulbs
............
.246. 247. 273
Replacement Bulbs
............
273
Taillights
...............
.247. 273
Turn Signal
...................
74
Underhood
..................
228
Warning Lights
...............
100
Loading Your Vehicle
............
248
Locks
.........................
47
Locks. Rear Door Security
........
50
Locks. Remote Control
...........
48
Long Distance Driving
...........
174
Low Battery
...................
193
Low Fuel Warning
..............
109
Low Oil Pressure Warning
........
102
Low Washer Fluid
Warning Light
................
105
Lubricants
&
Fluids
.........
272
Maintenance Record
...........
294
Maintenance Schedule
...........
275
Maintenance Services. Scheduled
.
.
278
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
......
104
Index
Manual Front Seat
...............
10
Manual Reclining Seatback
........
12
Manual Remote Control Mirror
.....
87
Maxifuse/Relay Center
..........
268
Methanol in Gasoline
............
223
Mileage Indicator
Mirrors
(see
Odometer
&
Speedometer)
Convex Outside
...............
87
Electrochromic Day/Night
.......
86
Inside Manual Day/Night
........
86
Manual Remote Control
.........
87
Power Remote Control
..........
88
Visor Vanity
..................
88
Mountain Driving
...............
176
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Requirements
............
.57. 184
Night Driving
..................
165
octane Requirements
Odometer and Speedometer
........
98
(see
Fuel Requirements)
Oil. Engine
....................
231
Capacity
....................
270
Pressure Gage
................
110
Quality
.....................
232
Thickness
...................
232
Used
Oil
....................
233
Warning Lights
..........
.102. 103
When to Change
..............
233
Oil Level Warning
..............
103
Operation of Lights
..............
82
Outside Rearview Mirrors
.........
87
Overdrive. Automatic
............
64
Overheated Engine Warnings
....
.202.
204.205.206.228.240. 241
Overheated Engine Coolant
Warning
...........
.202.204.205.
206.228.240. 241
Owner Checks
&
Services
........
287
Park
.................
1
.......
62
Park.
Shifting Into
...........
.68. 69
Park. Shifting Out of
.............
70
Parking
On Hills
................
.177. 189
Over
Things
That
Burn
..........
71
With the Engine Running
....
.70. 72
Parking Brake
..................
67
PASS-Key
IITM
..................
52
Passenger Belts (see
Safety Belts)
Passing
.......................
163
Performance Shifting
.............
66
Polishing and Waxing
Power Antenna
.................
142
Power Door Locks
...............
48
Power Mirrors
..................
88
Power Seat
.....................
11
Power Steering
.................
160
Power Steering Fluid
...
.242. 270, 272
Power Windows
............
.73. 269
Pregnancy. Use
of
Safety Belts
During
......................
29
Publications (see
Service Publications)
(see
Appearance Care)
Radiator Overheating
(see
Overheated Engine)
Radiator Pressure Cap
......
.206. 241
Radio
(see
Audio Systems)
...
316
Reading Lights
..................
85
Rearview Mirror
................
86
Rear Window Defogger
......
.121, 124
Reclining Seatbacks
..............
12
Remote Fuel Door Lock
.........
225
Remote Trunk Release
............
56
Replacement Bulbs
..............
273
Replacement
Parts
..............
271
Replacement, Windshield Wiper
...
248
Replacing Brake System
Parts
.....
245
Replacing Safety Belts
............
44
Replacing Tires
................
252
Replacing Wheels
..............
255
Reporting Safety Defects
.........
302
Restraints, Child
................
34
Restraints, Head
.................
13
Retained Accessory Power
.........
58
Roads, Hill and Mountain
.........
176
Road Signs
....................
145
Color
......................
146
Shape
......................
147
Symbols
....................
148
Traffic Lights
................
148
Your Own Signals
.............
149
Roadside Assistance Program
.....
303
Remote Keyless Entry
............
49
Rocking Your Vehicle
.......
.182. 219
Rotation. Tire
..................
251
S
afety Belts
....................
13
Adults
.......................
18
Center Passenger Position
.......
30
Checking
....................
44
Children
.................
.33, 42
Child Restraints
...............
34
Child Restraints-How to
Install Them
................
36
Child Restraints, Where to Put
....
34
Cleaning
....................
260
Driver Position
...............
18
Extender
.....................
43
Lap-Shoulder Belt
..............
19
How to Wear
..................
18
Passenger Belts
................
29
Pregnancy, Use During
..........
29
Questions
&
Answers
......
.17, 21. 22. 43. 44
Rear Safety Belts
..............
31
Reminder Light
................
18
Replacement
..................
44
Right Front. Adult Passenger
.....
29
Smaller Children and Babies
.....
33
Top Strap
....................
36
Torn
........................
44
Twisted
...................... 22
Why Your Should Wear
Safety Belts
.................
15
Safety Defects, Reporting
.........
302
Scheduled Maintenance Services
...
278
Seat Belts (see
Safety
Belts)
Seat Controls
...................
10
Adjustment
...................
10
Adjustable Support Seat
.........
11
Head Restraints
................
13
Manual Front Seat
.............
10
Manual Reclining Seatback
......
12
Power Seat
...................
11
Reclining Seatback
.............
12
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
...
104
Service Information
.............
222
Service
parts
Identification Label
. .
-265
Service Publications
............
304
Service Publications Order Form
.
.
307
Service Station Information
......
320
Setting the Clock
...............
127
Setting the Trip Odometer
........
98
317
Index
4
c
Sheet Metal Damage
............
263
Shifting Into P (Park)
.........
.68. 69
Shifting Out of P (Park)
...........
70
Shifting the Transaxle
............
61
Signaling Turns
............
.74. 149
Signs. Road
...................
146
SIR (Air Bag)
..................
22
Skidding
......................
164
Snowstorm. If You’re Caught in a
...
181
Sound Equipment. Adding
........
126
Sound Systems (see
Audio Systems)
Spare Tire. Compact
.............
218
Specifications
&
Capacities
.......
271
Speed Control (see
Cruise
Control)
Speedometer and Odometer
........
98
Stains. Removing
...............
259
Standard Climate Control
.........
120
Starting Your Engine
.............
58
Starting Your Vehicle
if
the Battery
is “Dead” (see
Jump
Starting)
Steering
In Emergencies
...............
161
Off-Road Recovery
............
162
Power
......................
160
Tips
........................
160
Variable Effort
...............
160
Steering Wheel Controls
.........
139
318
Steering Wheel. Tilt
..............
73
Stereo Sound Systems (see
Audio Systems)
Storage
Armrest
.....................
90
Convenience Net
.............
-56
Door Cup Holder
..............
90
Glove Box
....................
56
Rear Compartment
.............
91
Sunglasses
...................
93
Storing Your Vehicle
............
245
Stuck; If You Are
...............
218
Sunroof. Express Open
...........
89
Sun Visors
.....................
88
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
System
......................
22
Tachometer
....................
99
Tape Player (see
Audio Systems)
Technical Facts
&
Specifications
Bulbs
......................
273
Electrical Equipment.
Add-on
...........
.93. 126. 265
Fluid Capacities
&
Types
..
.270. 272
Fuses
&
Circuit Breakers
.......
266
Service Parts Identification
Label
.....................
265
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN)
....................
264
Temperature Warning
.......
.101, 109
Theft-Deterrent System
...........
51
Security Light
.................
53
Thermostat
....................
241
Tilt Steering Wheel
..............
73
Time, Setting the
...............
127
Tires
.........................
250
Air Inflator System
............
209
Blowout
....................
208
Buying New
.................
252
Chains
.................
.218, 256
Flat, Changing
...............
210
Inflation
....................
250
Inspection
&
Rotation
..........
251
Loading
....................
250
Pressure
................
.218, 250
Quality Grading
..............
253
Spare, Compact
...............
218
Wear Indicators
..............
253
Wheel Alignment
&
Tire Balance
...............
255
Wheel Replacement
...........
255
When to Replace Wheels
.......
255
Winter Driving
...............
179
Torque Lock
...................
179
Towing a Trailer
................
183
Towing Your Pontiac
............
197
Traction Control
................
157
Traction Control System
Warning Light
................
107
Traffic Lights
..................
148
Trailer Towing
.................
183
Transaxle, Automatic
Transmission, Automatic
Trip Odometer
................
98
Trunk
Lock
........................
55
Release, Remote Power
.........
56
(see
Automatic Transaxle)
(see
Automatic Transaxle)
Turn Signal Indicator
.............
74
Turn SignaUHeadlight Beam
Lever
.......................
73
Cruise Control
................
77
Headlight High-Low
Lane Change Signals
...........
74
Turn Signal Indicator
...........
74
Windshield Washer
.............
76
Windshield Wipers
.............
75
Twilight Sentinel
................
84
Beam Changer
..............
83
...
160
Underhood Light
..............
228
Unleaded Gasoline.
.............
222
Upholstery Care
................
258
Urban Driving
.................
171
Variable Effort Steering
...
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN)
......................
264
Vehicle Loading
................
248
Vehicle Storage
................
245
Ventilation
................
.l21,
125
VIN
.........................
2 64
Visor Vanity Mirrors
.............
88
Voltmeter
......................
110
warning Flashers. Hazard
.......
192
Warning Lights
.................
100
Battery
.....................
104
Check Gages
.................
108
Anti-Lock Brake System
........
106
Brake
......................
105
Coolant Temperature
...........
101
Low Washer Fluid
............
105
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
.....
104
Oil
.....................
102. 103
Service Engine Soon
...........
104
Traction Control System
........
107
Washer. Windshield
..............
76
(GAWR)
..................
248
(GVWR)
..................
248
Wheel Alignment&Tire Balance
...
255
Wheel Covers.
How to Remove
...............
212
Wheel Nut Torque
.........
.216. 270
Wheel Replacement
.............
255
Windows. Power
................
73
Windshield Washer
...............
76
Fluid
...................
.76. 242
Low Fluid Warning Light
.......
105
Windshield Wiper Replacement
....
248
Windshield Wipers
......
.75. 261. 269
Weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Winter Driving
.................
179
Deep Snow
................
182
Wrecker Towing
................
197
If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
....
181
319
Service Station Information
See
87
oc
Hood
Release-
See Page 227
The Delco Freedom@ batter
no water.
See
Page 245
Engine
011
See Page 231
See Page 242
See Page 236
Tire-Loading Information label
on inside edge
of
driver’s door.
See Page 250
Fuel-
Capacity
18
U.S.
Gal.
(68
L)
Use unleaded
gas
only,
:&ne or higher (Code L Engine)
or
91
octane (Code
1
Engine).
y
needs
Check and add coolant
only
at
the
coolant recovery
tank.
The fluid should be
at or a little above the
FULL
HOT
mark
when the engine is warm. If the engine
is
cool,
the
level
should be between
the
FULL COLD
and
FULL
HOT
marks.
See Page 238
Compact Spare:
60
psi
(420
See Page 217
See
Page 222
-.
8..
320
WE
SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
Nattonal
Institute
for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE

Navigation menu